Перевод: со всех языков на английский

with one's hands joined

1 join hands

to clasp one another's hands (eg for dancing):

Join hands with your partner

They joined hands in a ring.
يمسِك بيد الآخَر

Arabic-English dictionary > join hands
2 giunto

"link;

Lasche;

union"

* * *

past part vedere giungere

* * *

giunto¹ agg. joined // a mani giunte, with one's hands joined.

giunto² s.m. (mecc.) joint; (di accoppiamento) coupling; (costruzioni navali) seam: giunto a cerniera, hinged joint; giunto a ganasce, fish joint (o splice); giunto a ginocchiera, toggle joint; giunto a snodo, knuckle joint; giunto assiale, splice; giunto a viti, muff coupling; giunto ad incastro, (carpenteria) gain joint; giunto cardanico, universale, universal joint; giunto di dilatazione, expansion joint; giunto di testa, butt (joint); giunto idraulico, hydraulic (o hydro-drive) coupling (o fluid flywheel); (con tenuta ad acqua) hydraulic joint; giunto sferico, ball (o ball-and-socket) joint.

* * *
['dʒunto] giunto (-a)
1. pp

See:

giungere

2. sm

Tecn coupling, joint

- giunto cardanico

- giunto elastico

* * *
['dʒunto] 1.
participio passato giungere
2.
aggettivo

a mani -e — with one's hands joined
3.
sostantivo maschile tecn. joint

giunto cardanico — cardan joint

* * *

giunto

/'dʒunto/

I participio passato

→ giungere

II aggettivo

a mani -e with one's hands joined

III sostantivo m.

tecn. joint

COMPOUNDS

giunto cardanico cardan joint.

Dizionario Italiano-Inglese > giunto
3 FYRIR

for

* * *

prep.

I. with dat.

1) before, in front of (ok vóru fyrir honum borin merkin);

fyrir dyrum, before the door;

2) before one, in one’s presence;

hón nefndist fyrir þeim Gunnhildr, she told them that her name was G.;

3) for;

hann lét ryðja fyrir þeim búðina, he had the booth cleared for them, for their reception;

4) before one, in one’s way;

fjörðr varð fyrir þeim, they came to a fjord;

sitja fyrir e-m, to lie in wait for one;

5) naut. term. before, off;

liggja fyrir bryggjum, to lie off the piers;

fyrir Humru-mynni, off the Humber;

6) before, at the head of, over;

vera fyrir liði, to be over the troops;

vera fyrir máli, to lead the case;

sitja fyrir svörum, to undertake the defence;

7) of time, ago;

fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago;

fyrir stundu, a while ago;

fyrir löngu, long ago;

vera fyrir e-u, to forebode (of a dream);

8) before, above, superior to;

Hálfdan svarti var fyrir þeim brœðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers;

9) denoting disadvantige, harm, suffering;

þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest E. thwart all thy affairs;

tók at eyðast fyrir herm lausa-fé, her money began to fail;

10) denoting obstacle, hindrance;

mikit gøri þer mér fyrir þessu máli, you make this case hard for me;

varð honum lítit fyrir því, it was a small matter for him;

Ásgrími þótti þungt fyrir, A. thought that things looked bad;

11) because of, for;

hon undi sér hvergri fyrir verkjum, she had no rest for pains;

fyrir hræðslu, for fear;

illa fœrt fyrir ísum, scarcely, passable for ice;

gáðu þeir eigi fyrir veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing, they neglected to make hay;

fyrir því at, because, since, as;

12) against;

gæt þín vel fyrir konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men;

beiða griða Baldri fyrir alls konar háska, against all kinds of harm;

13) fyrir sér, of oneself;

mikill fyrir sér, strong, powerful;

minnstr fyrir sér, smallest, weakest;

14) denoting manner or quality, with;

hvítr fyrir hærum, while with hoary hair;

II. with acc.

1) before, in front of;

halda fyrir augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes;

2) before, into the presence of;

stefna e-m fyrir dómstól, before a court;

3) over;

hlaupa fyrir björg, to leap over a precipice;

kasta fyrir borð, to throw overboard;

4) in one’s way, crossing one’s way;

ríða á leið fyrir þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them;

5) round, off;

sigla fyrir nes, to weather a point;

6) along, all along;

fyrir endilangan Noreg, all along Norway, from one end to the other;

draga ör fyrir odd, to draw the arrow past the point;

7) of time, fyrir dag, before day;

fyrir e-s minni, before one’s memory;

8) for, on behalf of;

vil ek bjóða at fara fyrir þik, I will offer to go for thee, in thy stead;

lögvörn fyrir mál, a lawful defence for a case;

9) for, for the benefit of;

þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, they cut the lyme-grass for them (the horses);

10) for, instead of, in place of, as;

11) for, because of (vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit);

fyrir þín orð, for thy words (intercession);

fyrir sína vinsæld, by reason of his popularity;

12) denoting value, price;

fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks;

fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost;

13) in spite of, against (giptast fyrir ráð e-s);

14) joined with adverbs ending in -an, governing acc. (fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan);

fyrir austan, sunnan fjall, east, south of the fell;

fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge;

fyrir handan á, beyond the river;

fyrir innan garð, inside the fence;

III. as adverb or ellipt.

1) ahead, before, opp. to eptir;

þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, when this came first, preceded;

2) first;

mun ek þar eptir gera sem þér gerit fyrir, I shall do to you according as you do first;

3) at hand, present, to the fore;

föng þau, er fyrir vóru, stores that were at hand;

þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already present (before the bride and bridegroom came);

4) e-m verðr e-t fyrir, one takes a certain step, acts so and so;

Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. was at a loss what to do;

e-t mælist vel (illa) fyrir, a thing is well (ill) spoken or reported of (kvæðit mæltist vel fyrir).

* * *

prep., in the Editions spelt differently; in MSS. this word is usually abbreviated either  (i. e. firir), or Ꝼ̆, fur͛, fvr͛ (i. e. fyrir); in some MSS. it is idiomatically spelt with i, fir͛, e. g. Arna-Magn. 382 (Bs. i. 263 sqq.); and even in the old Miracle-book Arna-Magn. 645 (Bs. i. 333 sqq.), just as ifir is written for yfir ( over); in a few MSS. it is written as a monosyllable fyr, e. g. D. I. i. 475, Mork. passim; in Kb. (Sæm.-Edda) occurs fyr telia, Vsp. I; fyr norðan, 36; fyr dyrum, Gm. 22; fyr vestan ver, Hkv. 2. 8; in other places as a dissyll. fyrir, e. g. Hm. 56, Gm. 54, Skm. 34, Ls. 15, Am. 64, Hkv. 2. 2, 19 (quoted from Bugge’s edition, see his preface, p. xvi); fyr and fyrir stand to one another in the same relation as ept to eptir, und to undir, of ( super) to yfir: this monosyllabic form is obsolete, save in the compds, where ‘for-’ is more common than ‘fyrir-;’ in some cases both forms are used, e. g. for-dæming and fyrir-dæming; in others only one, but without any fixed rule: again, the forms fyri, fyre, or fire, which are often used in Edd., are just as wrong, as if one were to say epti, undi, yfi; yet this spelling is found now and then in MSS., as, fyre, Ó. H. (facsimile); fire, Grág. Sb. ii. 288 (also facsimile): the particles í and á are sometimes added, í fur, Fms. iv. 137; í fyrir, passim; á fur, Haustl. 1. [Ulf. faur and faura; A. S. fore and for; Engl. for and fore-; Germ. für and vor; Dan. for; Swed. för; Gr. προ-; Lat. pro, prae.]

WITH DAT., chiefly without the notion of movement.

A. LOCAL:

I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrum, before the doors, at the doors, Nj. 14, Vsp. 53, Hm. 69, Edda 130; niðr f. smiðju-dyrum, Eg. 142:—ahead, úti fyrir búðinni, Nj. 181; kómusk sauðirnir upp á fjallit f. þeim, ahead of them, 27; vóru fyrir honum borin merkin, the banner was borne before him, 274; göra orð fyrir sér, to send word before one, Fms. vii. 207, Hkr. iii. 335 (Ó. H. 201, l. c., frá sér):—also denoting direction, niðri í eldinum f. sér, beneath in the fire before them, Nj. 204; þeir sá f. sér bæ mikinn, they saw before them a great building, i. e. they came to a great house, Eg. 546; öðrum f. sér ( in front) en öðrum á bak sér, Grág. i. 5.

2. before one, before one’s face, in one’s presence; úhelgaða ek Otkel f. búum, before the neighbours, Nj. 87; lýsi ek f. búum fimm, 218; lýsa e-u ( to proclaim) f. e-m, Ld. 8; hann hermdi boð öll f. Gizuri, Nj. 78; hón nefndisk f. þeim Gunnhildr, told them that her name was G., Fms. i. 8; kæra e-t f. e-m, Ó. H. 60; slíkar fortölur hafði hann f. þeim, Nj. 200; the saying, því læra börnin málið að það er f. þeim haft, bairns learn to speak because it is done before them, i. e. because they hear it; hafa gott (íllt) f. e-m, to give a good (bad) example, e. g. in the presence of children; lifa vel f. Guði, to live well before God, 623. 29; stór ábyrgðar-hluti f. Guði, Nj. 199; sem þeir sjá réttast f. Guði, Grág. i. (pref.); fyrir öllum þeim, Hom. 89; á laun f. öðrum mönnum, hidden from other men, unknown to them, Grág. i. 337, Jb. 378; nú skaltú vera vin minn mikill f. húsfreyju minni, i. e. when you talk to my wife, Nj. 265; fyrir Drottni, before the Lord, Merl. 2. 78.

3. denoting reception of guests, visitors; hann lét ryðja f. þeim búðina, he had the room cleared for them, for their reception, Nj. 228; Valhöll ryðja fyr vegnu fólki, i. e. to clear Valhalla for slain folk, Em. I; ryðja vígvöll f. vegundum, Nj. 212; ljúka upp f. e-m, to open the door for one, Fms. xi. 323, Stj. 5; rýma pallinn f. þeim, Eg. 304; hann lét göra eld f. þeim, he had a fire made for them, 204; þeir görðu eld. f. sér, Fms. xi. 63; … veizlur þar sem fyrir honum var búit, banquets that were ready for him, Eg. 45.

II. before one, in one’s way; þar er díki varð f. þeim, Eg. 530; á (fjörðr) varð f. þeim, a river, fjord, was before them, i. e. they came to it, 133, 161; at verða eigi f. liði yðru, 51; maðr sá varð f. Vindum, that man was overtaken by the V., Hkr. iii. 363; þeirra manna er f. honum urðu, Eg. 92.

2. sitja f. e-m, to lie in wait for one, Ld. 218, Nj. 107; lá f. henni í skóginum, Edda (pref.); sitja f. rekum, to sit watching for wrecks, Eg. 136 (fyrir-sát).

3. ellipt., menn urðu at gæta sín er f. urðu, Nj. 100; Egill var þar f. í runninum, E. was before (them), lay in ambush, Eg. 378; hafði sá bana er f. varð, who was before (the arrow), i. e. he was hit, Nj. 8.

4. verða f. e-u, to be hit, taken, suffer from a thing; ef hann verðr f. drepi, if he be struck, Grág. ii. 19; verða f. áverka, to be wounded, suffer injury, Ld. 140; verða f. reiði konungs, to fall into disgrace with the king, Eg. 226; verða f. ósköpum, to become the victim of a spell, spell-bound, Fas. i. 130; sitja f. hvers manns ámæli, to be the object of all men’s blame, Nj. 71; vera eigi f. sönnu hafðr, to be unjustly charged with a thing, to be innocent.

III. a naut. term, before, off; liggja f. bryggjum, to lie off the pier, Ld. 166; skip fljóta f. strengjum, Sks. 116; þeir lágu f. bænum, they lay off the town, Bs. i. 18; liggja úti f. Jótlands-síðu, off Jutland, Eg. 261; hann druknaði f. Jaðri, off the J., Fms. i. II; þeir kómu at honum f. Sjólandi, off Zealand, x. 394; hafa úti leiðangr f. landi, Hkr. i. 301; f. Humru-minni, off the Humber, Orkn. 338, cp. Km. 3, 8, 9, 13, 19, 21; fyrir Nesjum, off the Ness, Vellekla; fyrir Tungum, Sighvat; fyrir Spáni, off Spain, Orkn. 356.

IV. before, at the head of, denoting leadership; smalamaðr f. búi föður síns, Ver. 26 (of king David); vera f. liði, to be over the troops, Eg. 292, Nj. 7; vera f. máli, to lead the case, Band. 8; vera forstjóri f. búi, to be steward over the household, Eg. 52; ráða f. landi, ríki, etc., to rule, govern, Ó H. 33, Nj. 5; hverr f. eldinum réði, who was the ringleader of the fire, Eg. 239; ráða f. e-u, to rule, manage a thing, passim: the phrase, sitja f. svörum, to respond on one’s behalf, Ölk. 36, Band. 12; hafa svör f. e-m, to be the chief spokesman, Fms. x. 101, Dipl. v. 26.

V. special usages; friða f. e-m, to make peace for one, Fms. vii. 16, Bs. i. 65; bæta f. e-m, to make things good for one, Hom. 109; túlka, vera túlkr, flytja (etc.) f. e-m, to plead for one, Fms. iii. 33, Nj. 128,—also spilla f. e-m, to disparage one, Eg. 255; haga, ætla f. e-u, to manage, arrange for one, Ld. 208, Sturl. i. 14, Boll. 356; rífka ráð f. e-m, to better one’s condition, Nj. 21; ráða heiman-fylgju ok tilgjöf f. frændkonu sinni, Js. 58; standa f. manni, to stand before, shield a man, stand between him and his enemy, Eg. 357, Grág. ii. 13; vera skjöldr f. e-m, 655 xxxii. 4; hafa kostnað f. e-u, to have the expences for a thing, Ld. 14; vinna f. e-m, to support one by one’s work, Sks. 251; starfa f. fé sínu, to manage one’s money, Ld. 166; hyggja f. e-u, to take heed for a thing, Nj. 109; hyggja f. sér, Fs. 5; hafa forsjá f. e-m, to provide for one, Ld. 186; sjá f. e-u, to see after, Eg. 118, Landn, 152; sjá þú nokkut ráð f. mér, Nj. 20: ironic. to put at rest, Háv. 40: ellipt., sjá vel f., to provide well for, Nj. 102.

B. TEMP. ago; fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago; fyrir stundu, a while ago, Nj. 80; fyrir litlu, a little while ago, Fms. i. 76, Ld. 134; fyrir skömmu, a sbort while ago; fyrir löngu, a long while ago, Nj. 260, Fms. i. 50; fyrir öndverðu, from the beginning, Grág. i. 80, ii. 323, 394, Finnb. 342; fyrir þeim, before they were born, Fms. i. 57.

2. the phrase, vera f. e-u, to forebode; vera f. stórfundum, Nj. 107, 277; þat hygg ek vera munu f. siða-skipti, Fms. xi. 12; þessi draumr mun vera f. kvámu nökkurs manns, vii. 163; dreyma draum f. e-u, 8; fyrir tiðendum, ii. 65:—spá f. e-m, to ‘spae’ before, prophecy to one, Nj. 171.

C. METAPH.:

I. before, above; þóttu þeir þar f. öllum ungum mönnum, Dropl. 7; þykkisk hann mjök f. öðrum mönnum, Ld. 38; ver f. hirðmönnum, be first among my herdsmen, Eg. 65; Hálfdan svarti var f. þeim bræðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers, Fms. i. 4; þorgrímr var f. sonum Önundar, Grett. 87; var Haraldr mest f. þeim at virðingu, Fms. i. 47.

II. denoting help, assistance; haun skal rétta vættið f. þeim, Grág. i. 45 (vide above A. IV and V).

2. the following seem to be Latinisms, láta lífit f. heilagri Kristni, to give up one’s life for holy Christianity, = Lat. pro, Fms. vii. 172; ganga undir píslir fyrir Guðs nafni, Blas. 38; gjalda önd mína f. önd þinni, Johann. 17; gefa gjöf f. sál sinni ( pro animâ suâ), H. E. i. 466; fyrir mér ok minni sál, Dipl. iv. 8; færa Guði fórnir f. e-m, 656 A; heita f. e-m, biðja f. e-m, to make a vow, pray for one (orare pro), Fms. iii. 48, Bs. i. 70; biðja f. mönnum, to intercede for, 19, Fms. xi. 287: even with a double construction, biðja f. stað sinn (acc., which is vernacular) ok heilagri kirkju (dat., which is a Latinism), x. 127.

III. denoting disadvantage, harm, suffering; þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest Egil thwart all thy affairs, Eg. 249; únýtir hann þá málit fyrir sér, then he ruins his own case, Grág. i. 36, Dropl. 14, 16; Manverjar rufu safnaðinn f. Þorkatli, the Manxmen broke up the assembly, i. e. forsook Thorkel, Fms. ix. 422; kom upp grátr f. henni, she burst into tears, 477; taka fé f. öðrum, to take another’s money, N. G. L. i. 20; knörr þann er konungr lét taka fyrir Þórólfi, Landn. 56; ef hross verðr tekit f. honum, if a horse of his be taken, Grág. i. 436; hann tók upp fé fyrir öllum, he seized property for them all, Ó. H. 60; e-t ferr ílla f. e-m, a thing turns out ill for one; svá fór f. Ólófu, so it came to pass for O., Vígl. 18; loka dyrr f. e-m, to lock the door in one’s face, Edda 21: þeir hafa eigi þessa menn f. yðr drepit, heldr f. yðrar sakir þessi víg vegit, i. e. they have not harmed you, but rather done you a service in slaying those men, Fbr. 33; tók at eyðask f. henni lausa-fé, her money began to fail, Nj. 29; rak á f. þeim storma ok stríðviðri, they were overtaken by gales and bad weather, Vígl. 27; Víglundr rak út knöttinn f. Jökli, V. drove the ball for J., i. e. so that he had to run after it, 24; sá er skar tygil f. Þóri, he who cut Thor’s line, Bragi; sverð brast f. mér, my sword broke, Korm. 98 (in a verse); brjóta e-t f. e-m, to break a thing for one, Bs. i. 15 (in a verse); Valgarðr braut krossa fyrir Merði ok öll heilög tákn, Nj. 167; árin brotnaði f. honum, his oar broke; allar kýrnar drápust fyrir honum, all his cows died.

2. denoting difficulty, hindrance; sitja f. sæmd e-s, to sit between oneself and one’s honour, i. e. to hinder one’s doing well, Sturl. 87; mikit göri þér mér f. þessu máli, you make this case sore for me, Eb. 124; þér er mikit f. máli, thy case stands ill, Fms. v. 325; ekki er Guði f. því, it is easy for God to do, 656 B. 9; varð honum lítið f. því, it was a small matter for him, he did it easily, Grett. III; mér er minna f. því, it is easier for me, Am. 60; þykkja mikit f. e-u, to be much grieved for a thing, do it unwillingly, Nj. 77; Icel. also say, þykja fyrir (ellipt.), to feel hurt, be displeased:—ellipt., er þeim lítið fyrir at villa járnburð þenna, it is a small matter for them to spoil this ordeal, Ó. H. 140; sem sér muni lítið f. at veiða Gunnar, Nj. 113; fast mun f. vera, it will be fast-fixed before (one), hard to move, Ld. 154; Ásgrími þótti þungt f., A. thought that things looked sad (heavy), Nj. 185; hann var lengi f., he was long about it, Fms. x. 205; hann var lengi f. ok kvað eigi nei við, he was cross and said not downright no, Þorf. Karl. 388.

IV. in a causal sense, for, because of, Lat. per, pro; sofa ek né mákat fugls jarmi fyrir, I cannot sleep for the shrill cry of birds, Edda 16 (in a verse); hon undi sér hvergi f. verkjum, she had no rest for pains, Bjarn. 69; fyrir gráti, tárum, = Lat. prae lacrymis; fyrir harmi, for sorrow; f. hlátri, for laughter, as in Engl.; þeir æddust f. einni konu, they went mad for the sake of one woman, Sól. 11; ílla fært f. ísum, scarce passable for ice, Fms. xi. 360; hætt var at sitja útar f. Miðgarðs-ormi, Edda 35; hann var lítt gengr f. sárinu, he could hardly walk for the wound, Fbr. 178; fyrir hræðslu, for fear, Hbl. 26; heptisk vegrinn f. þeim meinvættum sem …, Fs. 4; gáðu þeir eigi f. veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing they took no care to make hay, Landn. 30; fyrir riki konungs, for the king’s power, Eg. 67, 117; fyrir ofríki manna, Grág. i. 68; fyrir hví, for why? Eluc. 4; fyrir hví þeir væri þar, Eg. 375; fyrir því, at …, for that, because, Edda 35, Fms. i. 22, vii. 330, Ld. 104; en fyrir því nú at, now since, Skálda 171; nú fyrir því at, id., 169: the phrase, fyrir sökum, for the sake of, because of, passim; vide sök.

V. by, by the force of; öxlin gékk ór liði fyrir högginu, the shoulder was disjointed by the force of the stroke, Háv. 52.

2. denoting contest; falla f. e-m, to fall before one, i. e. fighting against one, Fms. i. 7, iv. 9, x. 196; verða halloki f. e-m, to be overcome in fighting one, Ld. 146; látask f. e-m, to perish by one, Eb. 34; hafa bana f. e-m, to be slain by one, Nj. 43; þeir kváðu fá fúnað hafa f. honum, 263; mæddisk hann f. þeim, he lost his breath in fighting them, Eg. 192; láta ríki f. e-m, to lose the kingdom before another, i. e. so that the latter gains it, 264; láta lausar eignir mínar f. þér, 505; láta hlut sinn f. e-m, Fs. 47; standask f. e-m, to stand one’s ground before one, Edda (pref.); hugðisk hann falla mundu f. sjóninni einni saman, that he would sink before his glance, 28, Hým. 12; halda hlut f. e-m, Ld. 54; halda frið ok frelsi f. várum óvinum, Fms. viii. 219; fara mun ek sem ek hefi áðr ætlað f. þínum draum ( thy dream notwithstanding), Ld. 216; þér farit hvárt er þér vilit f. mér, you go wherever you like for me, so far as I am concerted, Fær. 37; halda vöku f. sér, to keep oneself awake, Fms. i. 216.

β. with verbs, flýja, hlaupa, renna, stökkva f. e-m, to fly, leap, run before one, i. e. to be pursued, Bs. i. 774, Grág. ii. 359; at hann rynni f. þrælum hans, Ld. 64; fyrir þessum úfriði stökk Þangbrandr til Noregs, 180; skyldi hann ganga ór á f. Hofsmönnum, Landn. 178; ganga f. e-u, to give way before, yield to a thing, Fms. i. 305, x. 292; vægja f. e-m, to yield to one, give way, Eg. 21, 187, Nj. 57, Ld. 234.

VI. against; verja land f. e-m, Eg. 32; verja landit f. Dönum ok öðrum víkingum, Fms. i. 23; til landvarnar f. víkingum, Eg. 260; landvarnar-maðr f. Norðmönnum, Fms. vi. 295; gæta brúarinnar f. bergrisum, Edda 17; gæt þín vel f. konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men, Eg. 113; góð aðstoð f. tröllum ok dvergum, Bárð. 163; beiða Baldri griða f. allskonar háska, Edda 36; auðskæðr f. höggum, Eg. 770.

VII. in the sense of being driven before; fyrir straumi, veðri, vindi, before the stream, wind, weather (forstreymis, forvindis), Grág. ii. 384, Fms. vii. 262; halda f. veðri, to stand before the wind, Róm. 211.

2. rýrt mun verða f. honum smá-mennit, he will have an easy game with the small people, Nj. 94: ellipt., hafði sá bana er f. varð, 8; sprakk f., 16, 91.

VIII. fyrir sér, of oneself, esp. of physical power; mikill f. sér, strong, powerful; lítill f. sér, weak, feeble, Nj. 20, Ísl. ii. 368, Eg. 192; þér munuð kalla mik lítinn mann f. mér, Edda 33; minnstr f. sér, smallest, weakest, Eg. 123; gildr maðr f. sér, Ísl. ii. 322, Fms. ii. 145; herðimaðr mikiil f. sér, a hardy man, Nj. 270; hvat ert þú f. þér, what kind of fellow art thou? Clem. 33; vera einn f. sér, to be a strange fellow, Grett. 79 new Ed.; Icel. also say, göra mikið (lítið) f. sér, to make oneself big ( little).

β. sjóða e-t f. sér, to hesitate, saunter, Nj. 154; mæla f. munni, to talk between one’s teeth, to mutter, Orkn. 248, Nj. 249.

IX. denoting manner or quality; hvítr f. hærum, white with hoary hairs, Fms. vi. 95, Fas. ii. 540; gráir fyrir járnum, grey with steel, of a host in armour, Mag. 5; hjölt hvít f. silfri, a hilt white with silver = richly silvered, Eb. 226.

X. as adverb or ellipt.,

1. ahead, in front, = á undan, Lat. prae, opp. to eptir; þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, as this came first, preceded, Nj. 34; at einhverr mundi fara heim fyrir, that some one would go home first (to spy), Eg. 580; Egill fór f., E. went in before, id.; at vér ríðim þegar f. í nótt, 283.

β. first; hann stefndi f. málinu, en hann mælti eptir, one pronounced the words first, but the other repeated after him, Nj. 35; mun ek þar eptir göra sem þér gerit f., I shall do to you according as you do first, 90:—temp., sjau nóttum f., seven nights before, Grág. ii. 217.

2. to the fore, at hand, present; þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already to the fore, i. e. before the bride and bridegroom came, Nj. 11; úvíst er at vita hvar úvinir sitja á fleti fyrir, Hm. 1; skal þá lögmaðr þar f. vera, he shall be there present, Js. 3; heima í túni fyrir, Fær. 50; þar vóru fyrir Hildiríðar-synir, Eg. 98; var honum allt kunnigt fyrir, he knew all about the localities, 583; þeim ómögum, sem f. eru, who are there already, i. e. in his charge, Grág. i. 286: of things, föng þau er f. vóru, stores that were to the fore, at hand, Eg. 134.

3. fore, opp. to ‘back,’ of clothes; slæður settar f. allt gullknöppum, Eg. 516; bak ok fyrir, back and front, = bak ok brjóst, Mar.

XI. in the phrase, e-m verðr e-t fyrir, a thing is before one, i. e. one takes that and that step, acts so and so in an emergency; nú verðr öðrum þeirra þat f., at hann kveðr, now if the other part alleges, that …, Grág. i. 362; Kolbeini varð ekki f., K. had no resource, i. e. lost his head, Sturl. iii. 285:—the phrase, e-t mælisk vel (ílla) fyrir, a thing is well ( ill) reported of; víg Gunnars spurðisk ok mæltisk ílla fyrir um allar sveitir, Nj. 117, Sturl. ii. 151; mun þat vel f. mælask, people will like it well, Nj. 29, Þórð. 55 new Ed.; ílla mun þat f. mælask at ganga á sættir við frændr sína, Ld. 238; ok er lokit var, mæltisk kvæðit vel f., the people praised the poem, Fms. vii. 113.

XII. in special senses, either as prep. or adv. (vide A. V. above); segja leið f. skipi, to pilot a ship, Eg. 359; segja f. skipi, to say a prayer for a new ship or for any ship going to sea, Bs. i. 774, Fms. x. 480; mæla f. e-u, to dictate, Grág. ii. 266; mæla f. minni, to bring out a toast, vide minni; mæla f. sætt, i. 90; skipa, koma e-u f., to arrange, put right; ætla f. e-u, to make allowance for; trúa e-m f. e-u, to entrust one with; það fer mikið f. e-u (impers.), it is of great compass, bulky; hafa f. e-u, to have trouble with a thing; leita f. sér, to enquire; biðjask f., to say one’s prayers, vide biðja; mæla fyrir, segja f., etc., to order, Nj. 103, Js. 3: of a spell or solemn speaking, hann mælti svá f., at …, Landn. 34; spyrjask f., to enquire, Hkr. ii. 333; búask f., to prepare, make arrangement, Landn. 35, Sks. 551; skipask f., to draw up, Nj. 197; leggjask f., to lie down in despair, Bs. i. 194; spá fyrir, to ‘spae’ before, foretell; þeir menn er spá f. úorðna hluti, Fms. i. 96; segja f., to foretell, 76, Bb. 332; Njáll hefir ok sagt f. um æfi hans, Nj. 102; vita e-t f., to ‘wit’ beforehand, know the future, 98; sjá e-t f., to foresee, 162; ef þat er ætlat f., fore-ordained, id.

WITH ACC., mostly with the notion of movement.

A. LOCAL:

I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrrin, Nj. 198; láta síga brýnn f. brár, Hkv. Hjörv. 19; halda f. augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes, Nj. 132; leggja sverði fyrir brjóst e-m, to thrust a sword into his breast, 162, Fs. 39.

2. before one, before a court; stefna e-m f. dómstól, Fms. xi. 444; ganga, koma f. e-n, to go, come before one, Fms. i. 15, Eg. 426, Nj. 6, 129, passim; fyrir augu e-s, before one’s eyes, Stj. 611.

3. before, so as to shield; hann kom skildinum f. sik, he put the shield before him, Nj. 97, 115; halda skildi f. e-n, a duelling term, since the seconder had to hold one’s shield, Ísl. ii. 257.

4. joined to adverbs such as fram, aptr, út, inn, ofan, niðr, austr, vestr, suðr, norðr, all denoting direction; fram f., forward; aptr f., backward, etc.; hann reiddi öxina fram f. sik, a stroke forward with the axe, Fms. vii. 91; hann hljóp eigi skemra aptr en fram fyrir sik, Nj. 29; þótti honum hann skjóta brandinum austr til fjallanna f. sik, 195; komask út f. dyrr, to go outside the door, Eg. 206:—draga ofan f. brekku, to drag over the hill, Ld. 220; hrinda f. mel ofan, to thrust one over the gravel bank, Eg. 748; hlaupa f. björg, to leap over a precipice, Eb. 62, Landn. 36; elta e-n f. björg, Grág. ii. 34; hlaupa (kasta) f. borð, to leap ( throw) overboard, Fms. i. 178, Hkr. iii. 391, Ld. 226; síga ( to be hauled) niðr f. borgar-vegg, 656 C. 13, Fms. ix. 3; hlaupa niðr f. stafn, Eg. 142; niðr f. skaflinn, Dropl. 25; fyrir brekku, Orkn. 450, Glúm. 395 (in a verse).

II. in one’s way, crossing one’s way; þeir stefndu f. þá, Fms. ix. 475; ríða á leið f. þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them, Boll. 348; hlaupa ofan f. þá, Nj. 153; vóru allt komin f. hann bréf, letters were come before him, in his way, Fms. vii. 207; þeir felldu brota f. hann, viz. they felled trees before him, so as to stop him, viii. 60, ix. 357; leggja bann f. skip, to lay an embargo on a ship, Ld. 166.

III. round, off a point; fyrir nesit, Nj. 44; út f. Holm, out past the Holm, Fms. vii. 356: esp. as a naut. term, off a point on the shore, sigla f. England, Norðyrnbraland, Þrasnes, Spán, to sail by the coast of, stand off England, Northumberland, … Spain, Orkn. 338, 340, 342, 354; fyrir Yrjar, Fms. vii. (in a verse); fyrir Siggju, Aumar, Lista, Edda 91 (in a verse); er hann kom f. Elfina, when be came off the Gotha, Eg. 80; leggja land f. skut, to lay the land clear of the stern, i. e. to pass it, Edda l. c.; göra frið f. land sitt, to pacify the land from one end to another, Ld. 28; fyrir uppsprettu árinnar, to come to ( round) the sources of the river, Fms. iii. 183; fyrir garðs-enda, Grág. ii. 263; girða f. nes, to make a wall across the ness, block it up, cp. Lat. praesepire, praemunire, etc., Grág. ii. 263; so also binda f. op, poka, Lat. praeligare, praestringere; hlaða f. gat, holu, to stop a hole, opening; greri f. stúfinn, the stump (of the arm or leg) was healed, closed, Nj. 275; skjóta slagbrandi f. dyrr, to shoot a bolt before the door, to bar it, Dropl. 29; láta loku (lás) f. hurð, to lock a door, Gísl. 28; setja innsigli f. bréf, to set a seal to a letter, Dipl. i. 3: ellipt., setr hón þar lás fyrir, Ld. 42, Bs. i. 512.

2. along, all along; f. endilanga Danmörk, f. endilangan Noreg, all along Denmark, Norway, from one end to the other, Fms. iv. 319, xi. 91, Grett. 97:—öx álnar f. munn, an axe with an ell-long edge, Ld. 276; draga ör f. ödd, to draw the arrow past the point, an archer’s term, Fms. ii. 321.

IV. with verbs, fyrir ván komit, one is come past hope, all hope is gone, Sturl. i. 44, Hrafn. 13, Fms. ii. 131; taka f. munn e-m, to stop one’s mouth; taka f. háls, kverkar, e-m, to seize one by the throat, etc.; taka mál f. munn e-m, ‘verba alicujus praeripere,’ to take the word out of one’s mouth, xi. 12; taka f. hendr e-m, to seize one’s hands, stop one in doing a thing, Eb. 124; mod., taka fram f. hendrnar á e-m.

B. TEMP.: fyrir dag, before day, Eg. 80; f. miðjan dag, Ld. 14; f. sól, before sunrise, 268; f. sólar-lag, before sunset; f. miðjan aptan, Nj. 192; f. náttmál, 197; f. óttu, Sighvat; f. þinglausnir, Ölk. 37; f. Jól, Nj. 269; f. fardaga, Grág. ii. 341; viku f. sumar, 244; f. mitt sumar, Nj. 138; litlu f. vetr, Eg. 159; f. vetrnætr, Grág. ii. 217; f. e-s minni, before one’s memory, Íb. 16.

C. METAPH.:

I. above, before; hann hafdi mest fyrir aðra konunga hraustleikinn, Fms. x. 372.

II. for, on behalf of; vil ek bjóða at fara f. þik, I will go for thee, in thy stead, Nj. 77; ganga í skuld f. e-n, Grág. i. 283; Egill drakk … ok svá f. Ölvi, Eg. 210; kaupa e-t f. e-n, Nj. 157; gjalda gjöld f. e-n, Grág. i. 173; verja, sækja, sakir f. e-n, Eg. 504; hvárr f. sik, each for oneself, Dipl. v. 26; sættisk á öll mál f. Björn, Nj. 266; tók sættir f. Björn, Eg. 168; svara f. e-t, Fms. xi. 444; hafa til varnir f. sik, láta lýrit, lög-vörn koma f.; færa vörn f. sik, etc.; verja, sækja sakir f. sik, and many similar law phrases, Grág. passim; biðja konu f. e-n, to woo a lady for another, Fms. x. 44; fyrir mik, on my behalf, for my part, Gs. 16; lögvörn f. mál, a lawful defence for a case, Nj. 111; hafa til varnar f. sök, to defend a case, Grág. i. 61; halda skiladómi f. e-t, Dipl. iv. 8; festa lög f. e-t, vide festa.

III. in a distributive sense; penning f. mann, a penny per man, K. Þ. K. 88; fyrir nef hvert, per nose = per head, Lv. 89, Fms. i. 153, Ó. H. 141; hve f. marga menn, for how many men, Grág. i. 296; fyrir hverja stiku, for each yard, 497.

IV. for, for the benefit of; brjóta brauð f. hungraða, Hom. 75; þeir skáru f. þá melinn, they cut the straw for them (the horses), Nj. 265; leggja kostnað f. e-n, to defray one’s costs, Grág. i. 341.

V. for, instead of; hann setti sik f. Guð, Edda (pref.); hafa e-n f. Guð (Lat. pro Deo), Stj. 73, Barl. 131; geta, fá, kveðja mann f. sik, to get a man as one’s delegate or substitute, Grág. i. 48 passim; þeir höfðu vargstakka f. brynjur, Fs. 17; manna-höfuð vóru f. kljána, Nj. 275; gagl f. gás ok grís f. gamalt svín, Ó. H. 86; rif stór f. hlunna, Háv. 48; buðkr er f. húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; auga f. auga, tönn f. tönn, Exod. xxi. 24; skell f. skillinga, Þkv. 32.

VI. because of, for; vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit, Nj. 92, Fms. v. 162; eigi f. sakleysi, not without ground, i. 302; fyrir hvat (why, for what) stefndi Gunnarr þeim til úhelgi? Nj. 101; ok urðu f. þat sekir, Landn. 323; hafa ámæli f. e-t, Nj. 65, passim.

2. in a good sense, for one’s sake, for one; fyrir þín orð, for thy words, intercession, Ísl. ii. 217; vil ek göra f. þín orð, Ld. 158, Nj. 88; fyrir sína vinsæld, by his popularity, Fms. i. 259: the phrase, fyrir e-s sök, for one’s sake, vide sök: in swearing, a Latinism, fyrir trú mína, by my faith! (so in Old Engl. ‘fore God), Karl. 241; fyrir þitt líf, Stj. 514; ek særi þik f. alla krapta Krists ok manndóm þinn, Nj. 176. VII. for, at, denoting value, price; fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks, Eg. 714; er sik leysti út f. þrjú hundruð marka, Fms. ix. 421; ganga f. hundrað, to pass or go for a hundred, D. I. i. 316:—also of the thing bought, þú skalt reiða f. hana þrjár merkr, thou shall pay for her three marks, Ld. 30; fyrir þik skulu koma mannhefndir, Nj. 57; bætr f. víg, Ísl. ii. 274; bætr f. mann, Eg. 259, passim; fyrir áverka Þorgeirs kom legorðs-sökin, Nj. 101:—so in the phrase, fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost; fyrir öngan mun, by no means, Fms. i. 9, 157, Gþl. 531:—hafði hverr þeirra mann f. sik, eða tvá …, each slew a man or more for himself, i. e. they sold their lives dearly, Ó. H. 217.

2. ellipt., í staðinn f., instead of, Grág. i. 61; hér vil ek bjóða f. góð boð, Nj. 77; taka umbun f., Fms. vii. 161; svara slíku f. sem …, Boll. 350; þér skulut öngu f. týna nema lífinu, you shall lose nothing less than your head, Nj. 7.

VIII. by means of, by, through; fyrir þat sama orð, Stj.; fyrir sína náttúru, Fms. v. 162; fyrir messu-serkinn, iii. 168; fyrir þinn krapt ok frelsis-hönd, Pass. 19. 12; svikin f. orminn, by the serpent, Al. 63,—this use of fyrir seems to be a Latinism, but is very freq. in eccl. writings, esp. after the Reformation, N. T., Pass., Vídal.; fyrir munn Davíðs, through the mouth of David, etc.:—in good old historical writings such instances are few; þeir hlutuðu f. kast ( by dice), Sturl. ii. 159.

IX. in spite of, against; fyrir vilja sinn, N. G. L. i. 151; fyrir vitorð eðr vilja e-s, against one’s will or knowledge, Grág. ii. 348; kvángask (giptask) f. ráð e-s, i. 177, 178, Þiðr. 190; nú fara menn f. bann ( in spite of an embargo) landa á milli, Gþl. 517; hann gaf henni líf f. framkvæmd farar, i. e. although she had not fulfilled her journey ( her vow), Fms. v. 223; fyrir várt lof, vi. 220; fyrir allt þat, in spite of all that, Grett. 80 new Ed.; fyrir ráð fram, heedlessly; fyrir lög fram, vide fram.

X. denoting capacity, in the same sense as ‘at,’ C. II, p. 27, col. 1; scarcely found in old writers (who use ‘at’), but freq. in mod. usage, thus, eigi e-n f. vin, to have one for a friend, in old writers ‘at vin;’ hafa e-n f. fífl, fól, to make sport of one.

2. in old writers some phrases come near to this, e. g. vita f. vist, to know for certain, Dipl. i. 3; vita f. full sannindi, id., ii. 16; hafa f. satt, to take for sooth, believe, Nj. 135; koma f. eitt, to come ( turn) all to one, Lv. 11, Nj. 91, Fms. i. 208; koma f. ekki, to come to naught, be of no avail, Ísl. ii. 215; fyrir hitt mun ganga, it will turn the other way, Nj. 93; fyrir hann er einskis örvænt orðs né verks, from him everything may be expected, Ísl. ii. 326; hafa e-s víti f. varnað, to have another’s faults for warning, Sól. 19.

XI. joined with adverbs ending in -an, fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan, innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan, either with a following acc. denoting. direction, thus, fyrir austan, sunnan … fjall, east, south of the fell, i. e. on the eastern, southern side; fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge; fyrir útan fjall = Lat. ultra; fyrir innan fjall = Lat. infra; fyrir handan á, beyond the river; fyrir innan garð, inside the yard; fyrir ofan garð, above, beyond the yard, etc.; vide these adverbs:—used adverb., fyrir sunnan, in the south; fyrir vestan, in the west; fyrir norðan, in the north; fyrir austan, in the east,—current phrases in Icel. to mark the quarters of the country, cp. the ditty in Esp. Árb. year 1530; but not freq. in old writers, who simply say, norðr, suðr …, cp. Kristni S. ch. 1: absol. and adverb., fyrir ofan, uppermost; fyrir handan, on the other side:—fyrir útan e-t, except, save, Anal. 98, Vkv. 8; fyrir fram, vide fram.

☞ For- and fyrir- as prefixes, vide pp. 163–167 and below:

I. fore-, for-, meaning before, above, in the widest sense, local, temp., and metaph. furthering or the like, for-dyri, for-nes, for-ellri, for-beini, etc.

β. before, down, for-brekkis, -bergis, -streymis, -vindis, -viðris, etc.

2. in an intens. sense = before others, very, but not freq.; for-dyld, -góðr, -hagr, -hraustr, -kostuligr, -kuðr, -lítill, -ljótr, -prís, -ríkr, -snjallr.

II. (cp. fyrir, acc., C. IX), in a neg. or priv. sense; a few words occur even in the earliest poems, laws, and writers, e. g. for-að, -átta, -dæða, -nám, -næmi, -sending, -sköp, -verk, -veðja, -viða, -vitni, -ynja, -yrtir; those words at least seem to be original and vernacular: at a later time more words of the same kind crept in:

1. as early as writers of the 13th and 14th centuries, e. g. for-boð, -bænir, -djarfa, -dæma (fyrir-dæma), -taka (fyrir-taka), -þóttr; fyrir-bjóða, -fara, -göra, -koma, -kunna, -líta, -muna, -mæla, -vega, -verða.

2. introduced in some words at the time of the Reformation through Luther’s Bible and German hymns, and still later in many more through Danish, e. g. for-brjóta, -drífa, -láta, -líkast, -merkja, -nema, -sorga, -sóma, -standa, -svara, -þénusta, and several others; many of these, however, are not truly naturalised, being chiefly used in eccl. writings:—it is curious that if the pronoun be placed after the verb (which is the vernacular use in Icel.) the sense is in many cases reversed; thus, fyrir-koma, to destroy, but koma e-u fyrir can only mean to arrange; so also fyrir-mæla, to curse, and mæla fyrir, to speak for; for-bænir, but biðja fyrir e-m, etc.; in the latter case the sense is good and positive, in the former bad and negative; this seems to prove clearly that these compds are due to foreign influence.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > FYRIR
4 χείρ

χείρ, ἡ, χειρός, χειρί, χεῖρα, dual χεῖρε, χεροῖν, pl. χεῖρες, χερῶν, χεῖρας, penult. being regularly short, when the ult. is long; dat. pl. regularly χερσί ( χειρσί occurs in cod.Vat. of LXX, as Jd.7.19, 1 Ch.5.10, and late Inscrr. as CIG2811

A b.10 ([place name] Aphrodisias), 2942c ([place name] Tralles): but Poets used the penult. long or short in all cases, as the verse required, χερός, χερί, χέρα, χέρε, χέρες, χέρας (of which Hom. uses only χερί; χέρα h.Pan.40
); gen. dual χειροῖν S.El. 206
(lyr.), 1394 (lyr.), IG22.1498.76; gen. pl. χειρῶν ib.31, common in Prose.—Poet. forms, dat. pl. χείρεσι ([etym.] ν ) once in Hom., Il.20.468, also Q.S.2.401, 5.469 (v.l.); χείρεσσι Il.12.382
, Pi.O.10(11).62, S.Ant. 976 (lyr.), 1297 (lyr.), and once in trim., E.Alc. 756; χέρεσσι ([etym.] ν) Hes.Th. 519, 747, B.17.49; χερέεσσιν AJA36.460
([place name] Galatia):—[dialect] Dor. nom. [full] χέρς Timocr.9; [full] χήρ Sophr. in PSI11.1214a3 (also, = δίψακος, Ps.-Dsc.3.11); gen. χηρός Alcm.32
, IG42(1).121.22 (Epid., iv B. C.); acc. pl. χῆρας ib.96, [dialect] Aeol. χέρρας Alc.Supp.4.21
, Theoc.28.9.—On the accent and declension of these forms, v. Hdn.Gr.2.277, 748:— the hand, whether closed, παχεῖα Il.3.376
; βαρεῖα 11.235
, al.; or open, flat, χερσὶ καταπρηνέσσι, χειρὶ καταπρηνεῖ, 15.114, Od.13.164, al.; εἰς τὴν χ. ἐγχεάμενοί τι X.Cyr.1.3.9
: freq. in pl. where a single hand is meant, Il.23.384, etc.; reversely, sg. where more than one hand is spoken of, e.g. Od.3.37, etc.; dual joined with pl., ἄμφω χεῖρας 8.135
; χεῖρε ἀμφοτέρας Il.21.115
.

2 hand and arm, arm (cf. Ruf.Onom.11,82, Gal.2.347), πῆχυν χειρὸς δεξιτερῆς Il.21.166
; κατὰ χεῖρα μέσην ἀγκῶνος ἔνερθε 11.252
; χεῖρες ἀπ' ὤμων ἀΐσσοντο Hes.Th. 150
; χ. εἰς ὤμους γυμναί Longus 1.4
; ἐν χερσὶ γυναικῶν πεσέειν into the arms, Il.6.81, etc.: hence, words are added to denote the hand as distinct from the arm, ἄκρην οὔτασε χεῖρα 5.336
; περὶ ἄκραις ταῖς χ. χειρῖδας ἔχουσι X.Cyr.8.8.17
, cf. Pl. Prt. 352a.

3 of the hand or paw of animals, ὅσα [ζῷα] χεῖρας ἔχει X.Mem.1.4.14
; πορεύεσθαι ἐπὶ χειρῶν go on all fours. LXX Le.11.27; so of monkeys, Arist.HA 502b3; of the fore-paws of the hyena, Id.Fr. 369; of the bear, Plu.2.919a.

II Special usages:

1 to denote position, ποτέρας τῆς χερός; on which hand? E.Cyc. 681; ἐπὶ δεξιὰ χειρός Pi.P.6.19
; ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ χειρός Od.5.277
; χειρὸς εἰς τὰ δεξιά S.Fr. 598
; λαιᾶς χειρός A.Pr. 714
(but χείρ is often omitted with δεξιά, ἀριστερά, as we say the right, the left).

2 freq. in dat. of all numbers with Verbs which imply the use of hands, λάβε χειρί, χερσὶν ἑλέσθαι, Il.5.302, 10.501; χερσὶν ἀσπάζεσθαι Od.3.35
; προκαλίζεσθαι 18.20
; χειρί, χεροῖν ψαῦσαι, S.OT 1510, 1466: sts. this dat. is added pleon. by way of emphasis, ὄνυξι συλλαβὼν χερί Id.Aj. 310
.

3 gen., by the hand, χειρὸς ἔχειν τινά Il.4.154
; χειρὸς ἑλών 1.323
, etc.; γέροντα δὲ χειρὸς ἀνίστη he raised him by the hand, 24.515, cf. Od.14.319; χερὶ χειρὸς ἑλών Pi.P.9.122
; τινὰ χειρός ἑλκειν Id.N.11.32
; ἀνέλκειν τινὰ τῆς χ. Ar.V. 569
(anap.).

4 the acc. is used when one takes the hand of a person, χεῖρα γέροντος ἑλών Il. 24.361
; χεῖρ' ἕλε δεξιτερήν Od.1.121
; χεῖράς τ' ἀλλήλων λαβέτην, in pledge of good faith, Il.6.233; so ἔμβαλλε χ. δεξιὰν πρώτιστά μοι S.Tr. 1181
; also ἔμβαλλε χειρὸς πίστιν Id.Ph. 813
, cf. OC 1632.

5 other uses of the acc.:

a in prayer or entreaty, χεῖρας ἀνασχεῖν [θεοῖς] Il.3.275, etc.; ποτὶ γούνασι χεῖρας βάλλειν Od.6.310
; ἀμφὶ.. Ἀρήτης βάλε γούνασι χεῖρας Ὀδυσσεύς 7.142
; ἀμφὶ δὲ χεῖρας δειρῇ βάλλ' Ὀδυσῆϊ 23.207
; ἀμφί τινι χεῖρε β. 21.223
; περίβαλε δὲ χέρας Ar.Th. 914
, cf. A.Ag. 1559 (anap.); χεῖρας προΐσχεσθαι Th.3.58
, 66; so also χεῖρας ἀείρων Od.11.423
, cf. Il.7.130 (tm.); χ. ἀνατείνειν (v. ἀνατείνω 1.1
).

b τὰς χεῖρας αἴρειν to hold up hands in token of assent or choice, of persons voting, Ar.Ec. 264; τὴν χ. αἴρειν And.3.41
; ὅτῳ δοκεῖ ταῦτα, ἀράτω τὴν χ. X.An.5.6.33
, cf. 7.3.6; ἀνατεινάτω τὴν χ. ib.3.2.9, 33; χεῖρας ὀρεγνύς Il.22.37
; χεῖρ' ὀρέγων εἰς οὐρανόν 15.371
; χεῖρας ὀ. τινί Od.12.257
; πρός τινα Pi. P.4.240
; ποτὶ στόμα χεῖρ' ὀρέγεσθαι Il.24.506
(but χεῖρά τισι ὀ. to reach them one's hand in help, X.HG5.2.17); also χεῖρε ἑτάροισι πετάσσας Il.4.523
, etc.; πιτνὰς εἰς ἐμὲ χεῖρας Od.11.392
(but χεῖρε πετάσσας abs., of one swimming, etc., 5.374, al.).

c [Ἰλίου] χεῖρα ἑὴν ὑπερέσχε held the hand over

I as a protector, Il.9.420, etc.: less freq. τισι, 4.249, cf. 5.433; χεῖρά θ' ὕπερθεν ἔχεις IG14.1003.10
([place name] Rome).

d in hostile sense, χεῖρας or χεῖρα ἐπιφέρειν τινί, Il.1.89, 19.261, al.; χεῖρας ἐφιέναι τινί 1.567
, Od.1.254, al.; χεῖρας ἐπιβάλλειν τισί Plb.3.2.8
, etc.; χέρα τινὶ προσενεγκεῖν Pi.P.9.36
; χεῖρας ἐπί τινι ἰάλλειν, v. ἰάλλω 1.1.

e χεῖρας ἀπέχειν keep hands off, λοιμοῖο βαρείας χεῖρας ἀφέξει Il.1.97
codd.; κερτομίας δέ τοι.. καὶ χεῖρας ἀφέξω.. μνηστήρων Od.20.263
; ἀθανάτων ἀπέχειν χέρας A.Eu. 350
(lyr.); τὼ χεῖρε ἀπέχεται Pl.Smp. 213d
; παύειν χεῖράς τινος Il.21.294
.

f χεῖρας ἐπιτιθέναι τινί, in token of consecration, 1 Ep.Ti.5.22, etc.

6 with Preps.:

a ἀνὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν τινάς to be intimate with.., Plb.21.6.5; αἱ ἀνὰ χεῖρά τινων ὁμιλίαι S.E.M.1.64
; τὰ ἀνὰ χεῖρα πράγματα the matters in hand, Plu.2.614b, etc. (also οἱ ἀνὰ χ. χρόνοι the current period, PRyl.88.21 (ii A. D.); τὰ ἀνὰ χ. what comes his way, Ps.-Ptol.Centil.18; ἀνὰ χ. τῆς πύλης hard by.., LXX 2 Ki.15.2.

b ἀπὸ χειρὸς λογίσασθαι to reckon off-hand, roughly, Ar.V. 656 (anap.), cf. Luc.Hist.Conscr.29: but πότισον τὴν γῆν ἀπὸ χειρός by hand, PCair.Zen.155 (iii B. C.).

c διὰ χερῶν ἔχειν, λαβεῖν, literally, to have or take between the hands, A.Supp. 193, S.Ant. 916; διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν to hold in the hand, ib. 1258 (anap.), Ar.V. 597 (anap.); to have in hand, i. e. under control, Th.2.76; διὰ χειρῶν ἔχειν τὴν πολιτείαν Arist.Pol. 1308a27
; τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων keep under control, Th.2.13: later, to have a work in hand, be engaged in it, Phld.Acad.Ind.p.69M. ([etym.] χερός), D.H.Isoc.4; τὰ ὅπλα Plu.Cor.2
, etc. (also διὰ χ. by direct payment, opp. διὰ τῆς τραπέζης by banker's order, BGU1156.8 (i B. C.), etc.; cf. διὰ χ. ἔσπευδε τὴν πρᾶσιν Charito 1.12
); of arms, διὰ χειρὸς εἶναι Luc.Anach.35
; διὰ χ. ἔχειν, c. part., to be continually doing, Plu.2.767c; διὰ χειρός τινος ποιεῖν τι LXXJo.17.4
, al., cf. Act.Ap.7.25, al.

d ἐς χεῖρας λαβεῖν τι literally, S.El. 1120, etc.; to take a matter in hand, undertake it, πρᾶγμ' ἐς χέρας λαβόντ' E.Hec. 1242
; ἄγεσθαί τι ἐς χεῖρας Hdt.1.126
, 4.79, etc.; δοῦναί τινι ἐς χέρας, εἰς χεῖρα, S.El. 1348, X.Cyr.8.8.22; καταστῆσαι εἰς τὰς χ. τινος Aeschin.2.28
; of persons, ἵκεο χεῖρας ἐς ἁμάς thou hast fallen into our hands, Il.10.448 (in Hom. also simply ὅ τι χεῖρας ἵκοιτο Od.12.331
, cf. 24.172); so εἰς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν τινι X.Cyr.7.4.10
, cf. 2.4.15: generally, to have to do with any one, converse with him, Id.An.1.2.26 (so ἐς χεῖρα γῇ ξυνῆψαν E.Heracl. 429
): most freq. ἐς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν τισι to come to blows or close quarters with.., A.Th. 680; ἀλλήλοις Th.7.44
: abs., εἰς χ. ἐλθεῖν Id.4.96
; ἐς χ. ἰέναι Id.2.3
, 4.72, cf. PTeb.765.6 (ii B. C.); συνιέναι X.Cyr.8.8.22
; also ἐς χειρῶν νόμον (fort. νομόν) ἀπικέσθαι Hdt.9.48
; ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ (fort. νομῷ) ἀπόλλυσθαι Id.8.89
, cf. Aeschin.1.5, SIG167.37 (Mylasa, iv B. C.), Heraclid.Pol.25, Plb.1.34.5, 5.111.6; [full] ἐν χειρὸς νόμῳ Arist.Pol. 1285a10, D.H.6.26; ἐν χειρῶν νομαῖς SIG700.29
(Lete, ii B.C.), v. l. in LXX 3 Ma.1.5; ἐν χεροῖν δίκῃ cj. in E.Ba.738; εἰς χεῖρας συμμεῖξαι τοῖς πολεμίοις X.Cyr.2.1.11
; also εἰς χεῖρας δέχεσθαί τινας to await their charge, Id.An.4.3.31; ἐς χ. ὑπομεῖναί τινας Th. 5.72
.

e ἐκ χειρός by hand of man, S.Aj.27: from near at hand, at close range, ἐκ χειρὸς βάλλειν X.An.3.3.15
; ἀμύνασθαι ib.5.4.25; μάχεσθαι Id.HG7.2.14
, cf. D.S.19.6; πληγὰς ἐκ χ. ἀναδέξασθαι Plu.
tim.4; οὐ μὴ σωθῇ ἐκ χ. σιδήρου LXX Jb.20.24
; ἡ ἐκ χ. δίκη lynch law, D.H.4.37; ἡ ἐκ χ. βία Plb.9.4.6
: metaph., ἡ ἐκ χ. θεωρία closerange reading, D.H.Isoc.2; so of time, out of hand, off-hand, forthwith, Plb.5.41.7, al.

f δέπας μητρὶ ἐν χειρὶ τίθει Il.1.585
, cf. Od.13.57, 15.120, al. (always so of a cup, hence ἐν χερσὶ τίθει δέπας, though found in most codd., was condemned by the critics in Il.l.c., Od.3.51, 15.130); πρεσβήϊον ἐν χερὶ θήσω Il.8.289
; τόξον, ἔγχος ἔχων ἐν χειρί, 15.443, 17.604; σκῆπτρον δέ οἱ ἔμβαλε χειρί Od.2.37
; but ἐν.. χειρὶ σκῆπτρον ἔθηκεν Il.23.568
; of a gift, ἐν χερσὶ τίθει 1.441
, 446; ἐν ταῖς χ. ἔχειν, literally, Pl.R. 432d; τὰ ὅπλ' ἐν ταῖς χ. ἔχων D.9.8
, etc. (metaph., ἔτι μεμνημένων ὑμῶν καὶ μόνον οὐκ ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν ἕκαστ' ἐχόντων Id.18.226
); but ἐν χερσὶν ἔχειν also, to have in hand, be engaged in, τὸν γάμον Hdt.1.35
; ἑορτήν Plu.Alex.13
; τὴν περὶ Δημοσθένους πραγματείαν D.H.Th.1
; ἐν χειρί τινα δίκην ἔχων Pl.Tht. 172e
; ὁ ἐν χερσὶ πόλεμος the war in hand, D.H.8.87; περιτειχισμὸς ἐν χερσὶν ὤν ib.21; ἡ ἐν χ. ζήτησις S.E.M.11.208
, etc.; freq. of fighting, ἐν χερσί hand to hand, ἐν χ. ἦν ἡ μάχη Th.4.43
; ἐν χ. ἀποκτεῖναι Id.3.66
, cf. 4.57,96, etc.; ἐν χ. γίγνεσθαι τοῖς ἐναντίοις Id.5.72
; ἐν χ. εἶναί τινος X.HG4.6.11
; δίκη ἐν χερσί Hes.Op. 192
; ὁ ψόφος τῶν ὅπλων καὶ τῶν ἵππων ὁ φρυαγμὸς ἐν χερσὶν ἐδόκει εἶναι D.S.19.31
; ἡ ἐν χερσὶν [δυστυχία] Plu.Cleom.22: also in dual, τἀν χεροῖν S.Ant. 1345
(lyr.); ἐν χειρί τινος by the hand of.., LXX Jo.21.2, al.; ἐν χ. ἀγγέλου Act.Ap.7.35
(v.l.).

g ἐπὶ χειρὸς ἔχειν on or in one's hand, Thgn.490; ἐπὶ χεῖράς τινων ἐκφέρουσι put into their hands, Plu.2.815b; also ἐπὶ χεῖρά τινος next to, LXXNe.3.4.

h κατὰ χειρός, of washing the hands before meals, ὕδωρ κατὰ χειρός (sc. φερέτω τις), Ar.V. 1216, cf.Av. 464 (anap.), Fr. 502 (lyr.), Philox. 1, Ath.9.408e; (without ὕδωρ) κατὰ χ. ἐδόθη Alex.261.2
, cf. Arched. 2.3: prov. of that which is easily come by, Telecl.1.2 (anap.);
πάντα μοι κατὰ χ. ἦν τὰ πράγματα
at hand, Pherecr.146.5
; also κατὰ χειρῶν δοῦναι, χέειν, λαβεῖν, Philyll.3, Antiph.287 (v.l.), Men.470 (troch.), cf. Phot.s.v. κατὰ χειρὸς ὕδωρ: κατὰ χεῖρα in deed or act, κατὰ χ. γενναιότατοι D.H.7.6
; opp. συνέσει, Plu.Phil.7; κατὰ χεῖρά σου according to thy will, LXX Si.25.26: but κατὰ χεῖρας [τῆς σοφίας] by her side, ib.14.25.

i μετὰ χερσὶν ἔχειν between, i.e. in, the hands, Il.11.4, 15.717; [ἄλεισον] μετὰ χ. ἐνώμα Od.22.10
: μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν to have in hand, be engaged in, Hdt.7.16.β, Th.1.138.

k λάβε παρὰ χεῖρα take in hand, LXX To. 11.4; but τὸ πὰρ χειρός the work in hand, B.13.10.

l πρὸ χειρῶν
close before one, S.Ant. 1279
, E.Tr. 1207 (s.v.l.), Rh. 274; πρὸ χειρὸς εἶναι cj. in Pl.Com.69.5.

m πρὸς χειρός τινος by his hand, A.Supp.66 (lyr.), etc.; πρὸς ἐμὴν χεῖρα at the signs given by my hand, S.Ph. 148 (anap.); πρὸς χεῖρα ὑποβορβορύζοντες on pressure, Hp.Epid.4.7.

n ὑπὸ χερσὶ ἁλοῦσα under, i.e. by, another's hands, Il.2.374, etc.; ὑπὸ χεῖρα ποιεῖσθαι to bring under one's power, X.Ages.1.22; οἱ ὑπὸ χ. persons in one's power, D.6.34; ὑπὸ τὴν χ. ἐλθεῖν to come into one's hand, Luc.Herm.57, etc.; ὑπὸ χ. in hand, i.e. in stock, Arist.Mete. 369b33; but also, at hand, i.e. at once, Plu.2.548e; τὰ ὑπὸ χ. ib.56b, Dsc.1.35; ὁ ὑπὸ χ. the attendant, Dsc.5.75;
παρέργως καὶ ὑπὸ χ.
extempore, Plu.Arat.3
, etc.; also καθύπο χεῖρα κινῶν [τὰς οὐσίας], in Alchemy, Ps.-Democr. p.51 B.

III the hand often receives the attributes of the person using it, χ. μεγάλη, of Zeus, Il.15.695 (χ. παγκρατής, of God, Secund.Sent.3; χ. ὑπερμήκης, of the 'long arm' of the king, Hdt.8.140.β') ; θοὴ χ., of one throwing, Il.12.306; ἀφνειά Pi.O.7.1
, cf. S.El. 458; εὐσεβεστέρα, εὐφιλής, A.Ch. 141, Ag.34; κάρβανος ib. 1061; γεραιά E.Hec. 143
(anap.); πονηρά Id. Ion 1316
, etc.: to denote wealth or poverty, πλειοτέρῃ σὺν χ. Od.11.359
; κενεὰς σὺν χ. ἔχοντες 10.42
, cf. E.Hel. 1280, etc.

2 it is represented as acting of itself, χεῖρες μαιμῶσιν Il.13.77
, cf. S.Aj.50; χεὶρ ὁρᾷ τὸ δράσιμον A.Th. 554
; δήμου κρατοῦσα χ. Id.Supp. 604
(dub. l.): prov., ἁ δὲ χ. τὰν χ. νίζει Epich.273
; or simply, ἁ χ. τὰν χ. AP5.207
(Mel.).

3 pl., in theurgy, name for spiritual powers, αἱ δημιουργικαὶ [τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος] δυνάμεις ἃς θεουργῶν παῖδες χεῖρας ἀποκαλοῦσιν Procl. in Cra. p.101
P., cf. eund. in R.2.252K.

IV to denote act or deed, opp. mere words, in pl., ἔπεσιν καὶ χερσὶν ἀρήξειν Il.1.77
; μνῆμ' Ἑλένης χειρῶν of her handiwork, her art, Od.15.126 (so in sg., δώρημ' ἐκείνῳ τἀνδρὶ τῆς ἐμῆς χ. S.Tr. 603
); χερσὶν ἢ λόγῳ Id.OT 883
(lyr.), cf. OC 1297, etc.; τῇ χειρὶ χρᾶσθαι to use one's hands, i.c. be active, stirring, opp. ἀργὸς ἐπεστάναι, Hdt.3.78, cf. 9.72; τὰς χ. προσφέρειν to apply force, X.Mem.2.6.31: sg., βούλευμα μὲν τὸ Δῖον, Ἡφαίστου δὲ χείρ A.Pr. 619
; μιᾷ χειρί single-handed, D.21.219; χειρὶ καὶ ποδὶ καὶ πάσῃ δυνάμει Aeschin.3.109
, cf. 2.115; χερσίν τε ποσίν τε Il.20.360
, cf. Pi.O.10(11).62, esp. of using the hands in a fight, cf. supr. 11.6d, e, f; of deeds of violence, πρὶν χειρῶν γεύσασθαι before we try force, Od.20.181; ἀδίκων χ. ἄρχειν to give the first blow, X.Cyr.1.5.13, Antipho 4.2.1, Lys.4.11, etc.; ἀμυνόμενος ἄρχοντα χειρῶν Pl.Lg. 869d
: generally, χεῖρες violent measures, force, ἐπίσχετε θυμὸν ἐνιπῆς καὶ χειρῶν Od.20.267
; ὑπόδικος χερῶν A.Eu. 260
(lyr.); χερσὶ πεποιθώς Il.16.624
, etc.; ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ v. supr. 11.6d; ὅπως θανάτοιο βαρείας χ. ἀλάλκοι, v.l. for κῆρας, Il.21.548.

V a number, band, body of men, esp. of soldiers, χεὶρ μεγάλη Hdt.7.157
; in dat., οὐ σὺν μεγάλῃ χ. Id.5.72
; πολλῇ χ. 1.174
, Th.3.96, E.Heracl. 337; pleon., χ. μεγάλῃ πλήθεος Hdt.7.20
; δεδωμάτωμαι δ' οὐδ' ἐγὼ σμικρᾷ χερί A.Supp. 958
; οἰκεία χείρ, for χεὶρ οἰκετῶν, E.El. 629; σὺν πλήθει χερῶν S.OT 123
.

VI handwriting, τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χεῖρα ἀρνήσασθαι Hyp.Lyc.Fr.5
, cf. IG9(1).189 ([place name] Phocis); τῇ ἐμῇ χ. Παύλου I Ep. Cor.16.21, Ep.Col.4.18: copy, counterpart of a document, SIG712.31 (Crete, ii B.C.); deed, instrument, ἡ χ. ἥδε κυρία ἔστω PRein.28.18
(ii B.C.), cf. PCair.Zen. 477 (iii B.C.), etc.

b handiwork of an artist or workman, γλαφυρὰ χ. Theoc.Epigr.8.5
, etc.; αἱ Ἐφεσίου χεῖρες Herod.4.72
, cf. 6.66; σοφαὶ χέρες APl.4.262
; τὰς Φειδίου χ. Lib.Or. 30.22
.

VII of any implement resembling a hand:

1 a kind of gauntlet, X.Eq.12.5, Poll.1.135 (pl.).

2 χ. σιδηρᾶ grappling-iron, Th.4.25, 7.62; also of an anchor, AP6.38 (Phil.).

3 axle-tree, LXX 3 Ki.7.18(32).

4 in LXX, pillar or cairn, as it were a finger pointing to heaven, χεὶρ Ἀβεσσαλώμ LXX 2 Ki.18.18
; also ἀνέστακεν αὐτῷ χεῖρα, i.e. trophy, ib. 1 Ki.15.12.

5 χεῖρες ἐλάτιναι, of oars, Tim.Pers.7.

6 catch of a trigger, Hero Aut.13.9; χ. κατάγουσα τὴν τοξῖτιν Ph.Bel. 68.4
, cf. Hero Bel.78.2.

7 instrument of torture, LXX 4 Ma.8.13.

VIII handful, κορώνῃ χεῖρα πρόσδοτε κριθέων Phoen. 2.1
.

IX ointment containing five ingredients, Orib.Fr.89, Alex. Trall.7.1. (Cf. Arm. jein ( dzern), Alb. dore, Tocharian (A-dialect) tsar, (B-dialect) sar, all = hand.)

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > χείρ
5 mettre

mettre [mεtʀ]

━━━━━━━━━

1. transitive verb

2. reflexive verb

━━━━━━━━━

➭ TABLE 56

1. <

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

► Lorsque mettre s'emploie dans des expressions telles que mettre qch en place, se mettre à table, reportez-vous à l'autre mot.

━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

   a. ( = placer) to put

• mettre du sucre dans son thé to put sugar in one's tea

• mettre la balle dans le filet to put the ball into the net

• mettre qch debout to stand sth up

• mettre qch à terre to put sth down

• mettre qn dans le train to put sb on the train

• mets le chat dehors put the cat out

• mettre qn au régime to put sb on a diet

• cela m'a mis dans une situation difficile that has put me in a difficult position

• où mets-tu tes verres ? where do you keep your glasses?

• mettre un enfant à l'école to send a child to school

• mettre qn au pas to bring sb into line

• il met qu'il est bien arrivé he says that he arrived safely

• mettre son poing sur la figure de qn to punch sb in the face

► mettre qch à (+ infinitif)

• mettre qch à cuire to put sth on to cook

• mettre qch à chauffer to put sth on to heat

• mettre du linge à sécher (à l'intérieur) to hang washing up to dry ; (à l'extérieur) to hang washing out to dry

   b. ( = revêtir) to put on

• mettre une robe to put on a dress

• mettre du maquillage to put on some make-up

• mets-lui son chapeau put his hat on

• il avait mis un manteau he was wearing a coat

   c. ( = consacrer) to take

• j'ai mis deux heures à le faire I took two hours to do it

• le train met trois heures the train takes three hours

• il y a mis le temps ! he's taken his time!

• y mettre le prix to pay the price

• mettre de l'argent dans une affaire to put money into a business

• je suis prêt à mettre 500 € I'm willing to give 500 euros

   d. ( = faire fonctionner) to put on

• mettre le chauffage to put the heating on

• mettre les informations to put the news on

• mettre le réveil à 7 heures to set the alarm for 7 o'clock

• mets France Inter put on France Inter

   e. ( = installer) [+ eau] to lay on ; [+ placards] to put in ; [+ étagères, rideaux] to put up ; [+ moquette] to lay

• mettre du papier peint to hang wallpaper

   f. ( = supposer) mettons que je me sois trompé let's say I've got it wrong

• si un pays, mettons la Norvège, décide... if a country, Norway say, decides...

   g. (locutions) mettre les bouts to clear off (inf)

• mettre les voiles (inf) to clear off (inf)

• qu'est-ce qu'ils nous ont mis ! (inf) (bagarre, match) they gave us a real hammering! (inf)

• va te faire mettre ! (vulg!) fuck off! (vulg!)

2. <

► se mettre

   a. ( = se placer) [objet] to go

• mets-toi là (debout) stand there ; (assis) sit there

• se mettre au piano to sit down at the piano

• se mettre à l'ombre to go into the shade

• elle ne savait plus où se mettre she didn't know where to put herself

• il s'est mis dans une situation délicate he's put himself in an awkward situation

• ces verres se mettent dans le placard these glasses go in the cupboard

• il y a un bout de métal qui s'est mis dans l'engrenage a piece of metal has got caught in the works

   b. ( = s'habiller) se mettre en short to put on a pair of shorts

• se mettre une robe to put on a dress

• elle n'a plus rien à se mettre she's got nothing left to wear

   c. ( = s'ajouter) il s'est mis de l'encre sur les doigts he's got ink on his fingers

• il s'en est mis partout he's covered in it

   d. ( = se grouper) ils se sont mis à plusieurs pour pousser la voiture several of them joined forces to push the car

• se mettre avec qn ( = faire équipe) to team up with sb ; (en ménage) (inf) to move in with sb (inf)

• se mettre mal avec qn to get on the wrong side of sb

   e. ( = commencer) to start

• il est temps de s'y mettre it's time we got down to it

• qu'est-ce que tu es énervant quand tu t'y mets ! (inf) you can be a real pain once you get started! (inf)

► se mettre à + nom

• se mettre à une traduction to start a translation

• se mettre à la peinture to take up painting

• il s'est bien mis à l'anglais he's really taken to English► se mettre à + infinitif

• se mettre à rire to start laughing

• se mettre à traduire to start translating

• voilà qu'il se met à pleuvoir ! and now it's starting to rain!

* * *
mɛtʀ
1.

verbe transitif

1) (placer dans un endroit, une position) to put

on m'a mis devant — they put me at the front

je mets les enfants à la crèche — I send the children to a creche

2) ( projeter involontairement) to drop [confiture, beurre] ( sur on); to spill [liquide, poudre] ( sur on)

3) ( placer sur le corps) to put on [écharpe, fard]

4) ( placer dans le corps) to put in

on m'a mis un plombage — I had a filling

5) ( porter habituellement sur le corps) to wear

je ne mets jamais de chapeau — I never wear a hat

6) (placer dans une situation, un état)

mettre quelqu'un en colère — to make somebody angry

mettre quelqu'un de bonne humeur — to put somebody in a good mood

mettre quelqu'un au travail — to put somebody to work

mettre le riz à cuire — to put the rice on

mettre le linge à sécher — to put the washing out to dry

7) ( classer)

mettre quelque chose avant tout le reste or au-dessus de tout — to put something

8) ( disposer)

mettre les assiettes — to put the plates on the table

mettre les verres — to put out the glasses

mettre une autre chaise — to bring another chair

mettre une nappe — to put on a tablecloth

je t'ai mis des draps propres — I've put clean sheets on for you

9) ( faire fonctionner)

mettre la radio/les nouvelles — to put the radio/the news on

mets plus/moins fort! — turn it up/down!

mettre les phares — to switch on the headlights

mettre le réveil — to set the alarm

mettre le verrou — to bolt the door

10) ( installer) to put in [chauffage, douche, téléphone, placard]; to put up [rideau, lustre, étagère]

faire mettre le téléphone — to have a telephone put in

mettre du carrelage/de la moquette — to lay tiles/a carpet

faire mettre de la moquette — ( dans plusieurs pièces) to have carpets laid

11) ( écrire) to put up [inscription]

il met que tout va bien — ( dans une lettre) he says ou writes that everything's fine

qu'est-ce que je dois mettre? — what shall I put?

mettre au passif/en anglais — to put into the passive/into English

est-ce qu'on met un trait d'union à ‘multinational’? — is there a hyphen in ‘multinational’?

il faut mettre un trait d'union — you must put a hyphen in

mettez votre signature ici — sign here

mettez le pronom qui convient — ( remplacez) replace with the appropriate pronoun; ( bouchez les trous) insert the appropriate pronom

mettre en musique — to set to music

12) ( ajouter) to add [ingrédient] ( dans to); to put [accessoire]

mettre du sel dans la soupe — to put some salt in the soup

13) ( consacrer)

mettre tout son cœur dans son travail — to put one's heart into one's work

y mettre du sien — to put oneself into it

mettre toute son énergie à faire — to put all one's energy into doing

14) (investir, dépenser) to put [argent] (dans, sur into)

combien pouvez-vous mettre? — ( pour acheter) how much can you afford?; ( pour contribuer) how much can you put in?

15) ( prendre) ( du temps)

elle a (bien) mis une heure — it took her (easily) an hour

mettre un temps fou — (colloq) to take ages (colloq)

16) (colloq) ( vendre)

je vous mets des tomates? — would you like some tomatoes?

17) ( attribuer) to give [note]

18) (colloq) ( dire)

mettons dix dollars/à dix heures — let's say ten dollars/at ten

19) (colloq) ( supposer)

mettons qu'il vienne — supposing he comes

20) (sl) ( ficher)

tu peux te le mettre où je pense or quelque part — you know where you can put it (colloq)

2.

verbe intransitif

mettre bas — gén [vache] to calve; [brebis] to lamb; [jument] to foal

3.

se mettre verbe pronominal

1) (se placer dans un endroit, une position)

se mettre devant la fenêtre — ( debout) to stand in front of the window; ( assis) to sit down in front of the window

se mettre sur les mains — to stand on one's hands

se mettre sur le dos — to lie on one's back

se mettre au lit — to go to bed

se mettre debout — to stand up

ne plus savoir où se mettre — not to know where to put oneself

se mettre les mains sur la tête — to put one's hands on one's head

se mettre les doigts dans le nez — to pick one's nose

où est-ce que ça se met? — where does this go?

2) ( projeter involontairement sur soi) to spill [something] on oneself [liquide, poudre]

se mettre de la confiture — to get jam on oneself

s'en mettre partout — to get it all over oneself

3) ( placer sur son corps) to put on [veste, fard]

je ne sais pas quoi me mettre — I don't know what to put on

4) ( placer dans son corps) to put in

5) ( commencer)

se mettre à l'anglais — to take up English

elle s'est mise à leur recherche — she started looking for them

il va se mettre à pleuvoir — it's going to start raining

il se met à faire du vent — it's starting to get windy

6) ( tourner)

le temps s'est mis au froid/à la pluie — the weather has turned cold/to rain

7) (se placer dans une situation, un état)

se mettre en tort — to put oneself in the wrong

se mettre dans une situation impossible — to get (oneself) into an impossible situation

se mettre dans une sale affaire — to get involved in some shady business

je me mets de ton côté — I'm on your side

je préfère me mettre bien avec lui — I prefer to get on the right side of him

se mettre à l'aise — to make oneself comfortable

on va se mettre ensemble — (colloq) ( sous le même toit) we're going to live together

8) ( s'habiller)

se mettre en tenue d'été — to put on summer clothes

se mettre en jaune — to wear yellow

9) ( se grouper)

ce n'est pas la peine de vous (y) mettre à dix — there's no need for ten of you

ils s'y sont mis à au moins trente — there were at least thirty of them

* * *
mɛtʀ vt
1) (= placer) to put

Où est-ce que tu as mis les clés? — Where have you put the keys?

mettre en bouteille — to bottle

mettre en sac — to put in bags, to put in sacks

mettre qch à la poste — to post sth Grande-Bretagne to mail sth USA

mettre qn en examen pour qch — to charge Grande-Bretagne sb with sth, to indict USA sb for sth

mettre qn debout — to help sb to their feet

2) [vêtements] (= revêtir) to put on, (= porter) to wear

Mets ton gilet. — Put your cardigan on.

Je mets mon manteau et j'arrive. — I'll put on my coat and then I'll be ready.

Je ne mets plus mon manteau. — I no longer wear my coat.

Elle ne met pas souvent de jupe. — She doesn't often wear a skirt.

3) (= faire fonctionner) [chauffage, électricité] to put on, [réveil, minuteur] to set

Il fait froid, je vais mettre le chauffage. — It's cold, I'm going to put the heating on.

mettre en marche — to start

Comment met-on la machine à laver en marche? — How do you start the washing machine?

4) (= installer) [gaz, eau] to put in, to lay on

faire mettre le gaz — to have gas put in, to have gas installed

faire mettre l'électricité — to have electricity put in, to have electricity installed

5) (= consacrer)

mettre du temps à faire qch — to take time to do sth, to take time over sth

mettre 2 heures à faire qch — to take 2 hours to do sth, to take 2 hours over sth

Combien de temps as-tu mis pour aller à Lille? — How long did it take you to get to Lille?

Elle met des heures à se préparer. — She takes hours to get ready.

y mettre du sien — to pull one's weight

6) (= noter, écrire) to put

qu'est-ce qu'il a mis sur la carte? — what did he put on the card?

mettez les mots suivants au pluriel:... — put the following words into the plural:...

7) (= supposer)

mettons que... — let's suppose that..., let's say that...

* * *

mettre verb table: mettre

A vtr

1 (placer dans un endroit, une position) to put [chose, partie du corps, personne]; mettre un vase sur la table/des bûches dans la cheminée/le vin au frais to put a vase on the table/logs on the fire/the wine in a cool place; j'ai mis ta voiture au garage I've put your car in the garage for you; mettre les pieds sur la table/les mains sur la tête to put one's feet on the table/one's hands on one's head; mettre les mains en l'air/un timbre à l'envers to put one's hands up/a stamp on upside down; on m'a mis devant/tout au fond they put me at the front/right at the back; je l'ai mise sur ses pieds I put her on her feet; je mets les enfants à la crèche I send the children to a creche; il m'a mis en bas de chez moi he dropped me off outside my door; on m'a mis debout they stood me up; nous l'avons mise à l'hôtel we put her up at the hotel;

2 ( projeter involontairement) to drop [solide]; to spill [liquide, poudre]; mettre de la confiture sur le tapis to drop jam on the carpet; mettre de la colle/farine partout to spill glue/flour all over the place;

3 ( placer sur le corps) to put on [vêtement, bijou, maquillage, lunettes, préservatif, serviette]; mets ton écharpe put your scarf on; je vais mettre du mascara I'll put some mascara on;

4 ( placer dans le corps) to put in [tampon, suppositoire, plombage]; on m'a mis un plombage I had a filling;

5 ( porter habituellement sur le corps) to wear [lunettes, type de vêtement, parfum]; dans mon école les garçons mettent des cravates in my school boys wear ties; je ne mets jamais de chapeau I never wear a hat;

6 (placer dans une situation, un état) mettre qn dans une situation embarrassante to put sb in an embarrassing situation; mettre qn en colère/en joie to make sb angry/happy; mettre qn en fureur to enrage sb; mettre qn au désespoir to drive sb to despair; mettre qn de bonne/mauvaise humeur to put sb in a good/bad mood; tu me mets hors de moi you infuriate me; mettre qn à la chaîne/à la reliure to put sb on the assembly line/on binding; mettre qn au travail to put sb to work; mettre qn au piano/au latin to start sb on the piano/on Latin; mettre les enfants à regarder la télévision to put the children in front of the television; si vous nous quittez, on mettra quelqu'un d'autre if you leave us, we'll find somebody else; mettre le riz à cuire to put the rice on; mettre le linge à sécher to put the washing out to dry;

7 ( classer) mettre la famille avant tout le reste to put one's family first; mettre ses études au-dessus de tout to put one's studies first; je le mets au premier rang de tous les écrivains I rank him the best writer of all;

8 ( disposer) mettre les assiettes to put the plates on the table; mettre les verres/la moutarde/un cendrier to put out the glasses/the mustard/an ashtray; mettre les chaises/une autre chaise to bring chairs/another chair; mettre une nappe to put on a tablecloth; je t'ai mis des draps propres I've put clean sheets on for you;

9 ( faire fonctionner) mettre la radio/la télévision/le chauffage to put the radio/the television/the heating on; mettre les nouvelles/la deuxième chaîne to put the news/channel 2 on; mettre plus fort to turn up [appareil]; mettre moins fort to turn down [appareil]; mets plus/moins fort! turn it up/down!; mettre les essuie-glaces/les phares to switch on ou put on the windscreen GB ou windshield US wipers/the headlights; mettre le réveil to set the alarm; mettre le verrou to bolt the door; mettre le loquet to latch the door;

10 ( installer) to put in [chauffage, douche, téléphone, placard]; to put up [rideau, lustre, étagère]; faire mettre le téléphone to have a telephone put in; je t'ai mis une prise I've put in a socket for you; mettre de la moquette to lay a carpet; faire mettre de la moquette ( dans une pièce) to have a carpet laid; ( dans plusieurs pièces) to have carpets laid; mettre du carrelage to lay tiles;

11 ( écrire) to put up [inscription]; ils ont mis des graffiti partout/sur la colonne they've put graffiti everywhere/on the column; il met que tout va bien ( dans une lettre) he says ou writes that everything's fine; qu'est-ce que je dois mettre? what shall I put?; mettre au passif/au singulier to put into the passive/into the singular; mettre en vers to put into verse; je t'ai mis un mot I've left you a note; est-ce qu'on met un trait d'union à ‘multinational’? is there a hyphen in ‘multinational’?; il faut mettre un trait d'union you must put a hyphen in; mettre sa signature sur un document to put one's signature to a document; mettez votre signature ici sign here; mettez le pronom qui convient ( remplacez) replace with the appropriate pronoun; ( bouchez les trous) insert the appropriate pronom; mettre en musique to set to music; mettre en anglais to put into English; mettre son brouillon au propre or au net to write out ou up one 's notes;

12 ( ajouter) to add [ingrédient] (dans to); to put [accessoire, élément décoratif]; mettre du sel dans la soupe to put some salt in the soup; mettre un peu de piment dans un récit to add a little spice to a story; mettre une sonnette à son vélo/des pompons à ses pantoufles to put a bell on one's bicycle/pompoms on one's slippers; mettre une radio à sa voiture/une doublure à sa veste to put a radio in one's car/a lining in one's jacket;

13 ( consacrer) mettre tout son cœur dans son travail to put one's heart into one's work; y mettre du sien to put oneself into it; mettre toute son énergie à essayer de comprendre to put all one's energy into trying to understand; mettre des moyens importants au service d'une cause to use all possible means to further a cause; mettre de la rigueur dans sa démarche to become more thorough in one's approach;

14 (investir, dépenser) to put [argent] (dans, sur into); mettre tout son argent dans son commerce to put all one's money into one's business; j'ai tout mis sur le pétrole I've put everything into oil; il a tout mis sur un cheval/une équipe he's put everything on a horse/a team; combien pouvez-vous mettre? ( pour acheter) how much can you afford?; ( pour contribuer) how much can you put in?;

15 ( prendre) [activité] to take [heures, jours, années] (pour faire to do); elle a bien mis une heure it took her easily an hour; mettre un temps fou○ to take ages○;

16 ○( vendre) je vous mets des tomates? would you like some tomatoes?; je vous en mets combien? deux, trois? how many would you like? two, three?;

17 ○( attribuer) je vous ai mis trois sur vingt I've given you three out of twenty;

18 ○( battre) ils nous ont mis trois à zéro they beat us three nil GB ou three to nothing US; je lui ai mis une gifle I gave him/her a slap (across the face); tu veux que je te mette mon poing sur la figure? do you want my fist in your face○?; qu'est-ce qu'il m'a mis! what a thrashing○ he gave me!;

19 ○( partir) les mettre to beat it○; je dois les mettre I'd better beat it;

20 ○( dire) mettons dix dollars/à dix heures let's say ten dollars/at ten;

21 ○( supposer) mettons qu'il vienne, qu'est-ce que vous ferez? supposing ou say he comes, what will you do?;

22 ◑( ficher) tu peux te le mettre où je pense or quelque part you know where you can put○ it ou stick◑ it; va te faire mettre get stuffed◑!

B vi Vét, Zool mettre bas gén to give birth, to drop; [vache] to calve; [brebis] to lamb; [jument] to foal.

C se mettre vpr

1 (se placer dans un endroit, une position) se mettre devant la fenêtre ( debout) to stand in front of the window; ( assis) to sit down in front of the window; ( couché) to lie (down) in front of the window; se mettre sur les mains to stand on one's hands; se mettre sur le dos to lie on one's back; se mettre au lit to go to bed; se mettre debout to stand up; se mettre sur ses jambes to get to one's feet; ne plus savoir où se mettre not to know where to put oneself; se mettre les mains sur la tête to put one's hands on one's head; se mettre les doigts dans le nez to pick one's nose; où est-ce que ça se met? where does this go?;

2 ( projeter involontairement sur soi) to spill [sth] on oneself [liquide, poudre]; se mettre de la confiture to get jam on oneself; se mettre de la boue sur ses chaussures/de l'encre sur le nez/une poussière dans l'œil to get mud on one's shoes/ink on one's nose/some grit in one's eye; s'en mettre partout to get it all over oneself;

3 ( placer sur son corps) to put on [vêtement, bijou, maquillage]; se mettre un foulard/un collier/du rouge à lèvres to put on a scarf/a necklace/lipstick; se mettre de la poudre sur le visage to put some powder on one's face, to powder one's face; je ne sais pas quoi me mettre I don't know what to put on;

4 ( placer dans son corps) to put in [suppositoire, tampon];

5 ( commencer) se mettre à l'anglais/au tennis to take up English/tennis; se mettre à prendre des somnifères to start taking sleeping pills; ma voiture se met à avoir des problèmes my car is starting to go wrong; il va se mettre à pleuvoir it's going to start raining; il se met à faire froid/du vent it's starting to get cold/windy;

6 ( tourner) le temps s'est mis au froid/au beau/à la pluie the weather has turned cold/fine/to rain;

7 ( se lancer) elle s'est mise à leur recherche she started looking for them; je me suis mis sur l'affaire I started looking into the case;

8 (se placer dans une situation, un état) se mettre en tort to put oneself in the wrong; se mettre dans une situation impossible to get (oneself) into an impossible situation; se mettre dans une sale affaire to get involved in some shady business; je me mets de ton côté I'm on your side; je préfère me mettre bien avec lui I prefer to get on the right side of him; se mettre à l'aise to make oneself comfortable; se mettre en colère to get angry; se mettre nu to take off one's clothes; on va se mettre ensemble○ ( sous le même toit) we're going to live together; il s'est mis avec elle○ ( de son côté) he's on her side; ( sous le même toit) he's moved in with her;

9 ( s'habiller) se mettre en tenue d'été to put on summer clothes; se mettre en arlequin to dress up as Harlequin; se mettre en jaune to wear yellow;

10 ( se grouper) ce n'est pas la peine de vous (y) mettre à dix there's no need for ten of you; ils s'y sont mis à au moins trente there were at least thirty of them;

11 ○( manger) je m'en suis mis un maximum I really stuffed○ myself; s'en mettre plein la panse○ or lampe○ or gueule● to stuff○ oneself; qu'est-ce qu'on s'est mis! we really stuffed○ ourselves!;

12 ( se battre) qu'est-ce qu'on s'est mis! we really laid○ into each other!

[mɛtr] verbe transitif

1. [placer] to put

mettre sa confiance/tout son espoir en to put one's trust/all one's hopes in

j'avais mis beaucoup de moi-même dans le projet I'd put a lot into the project

elle a mis son talent au service des défavorisés she used her talent to help the underprivileged

mettre à: mettre une pièce à l'affiche to bill a play

je n'ai pas pu la mettre à l'école du quartier I couldn't get her into the local school

mettre un enfant au lit to put a child to bed

on m'a mis au standard they put me on the switchboard

mettre quelqu'un dans: mettre quelqu'un dans l'avion/le train to put somebody on the plane/the train

mettre ses enfants dans le privé to send one's children to private school

mettre quelqu'un en: mettre un enfant en pension to put a child in a ou to send a child to boarding school

mettre quelque chose sur: mettre 100 euros sur un cheval to put ou to lay 100 euros on a horse

mettre de l'argent sur son compte to put ou to pay some money into one's account

mettre quelqu'un en boîte (familier) to pull somebody's leg

2. [poser horizontalement] to lay, to put

mettre la main sur le bras de quelqu'un to lay ou to put one's hand on somebody's arm

mettre quelque chose à plat to lay something down flat

3. [disposer]

mettre le loquet to put the latch down

4. [ajuster] to set

mettre quelque chose droit to set something straight (sens propre)

mettre une pendule à l'heure to set a clock to the right time

mets la sonnerie à 20 h 30 set the alarm for 8:30 p.m

5. [établir - dans un état, une situation]

mettre quelque chose à: mettre un étang à sec to drain a pond

mettez les verbes à l'infinitif put the verbs into the infinitive

mettre quelqu'un à: mettre quelqu'un à l'amende to fine somebody, to impose a fine on somebody

mettre quelqu'un au travail to set somebody to work, to get somebody working

mettre quelqu'un au désespoir to cause somebody to despair

mettre quelqu'un dans: mettre quelqu'un dans la confidence to let somebody in on ou into the secret

mettre quelqu'un dans l'embarras

a. [perplexité] to put somebody in a predicament

b. [pauvreté] to put somebody in financial difficulty

mettre quelqu'un dans l'obligation de faire quelque chose to oblige somebody to do something

mettre en: mettre une maison en vente to put a house up for sale

mettre du vin en bouteilles to put wine into bottles, to bottle wine

mettre une plante en pot to pot a plant

mettre quelque chose en miettes to smash something to bits

mettre un poème en musique to set a poem to music

mettre quelque chose en vigueur to bring something into force ou operation

mettre quelque chose à: mettre quelque chose à cuire to put something on to cook

mettre quelque chose à réchauffer to heat something up (again)

mettre du linge à sécher to put ou to hang clothes up to dry

mettre quelque chose à tremper to put something to soak, to soak something

6. [fixer] to put

mettre une pièce à un pantalon to put a patch on ou to patch a pair of trousers

mettre un bouton à sa veste to sew a button on one's jacket

[ajouter] to put

il faut lui mettre des piles you have to put batteries in it

j'ai fait mettre de nouveaux verres à mes lunettes I had new lenses put in my glasses

7. [se vêtir, se coiffer, se chausser de] to put on (separable)

[porter régulièrement] to wear

mets une barrette put a (hair) slide in

je lui ai mis son manteau/ses gants I put his coat/his gloves on (for him)

8. [faire fonctionner - appareil] to turn ou to put ou to switch on (separable)

mets de la musique put some music on, play some music

mets les sports (familier) /la première chaîne put on the sport channel/channel one

9. [installer] to put in (separable), to install

faire mettre le chauffage central to have central heating put in ou installed

mettre du papier peint/de la moquette dans une pièce to wallpaper/to carpet a room

10. [consacrer - temps] to take

elle a mis trois mois à me répondre she took three months ou it took her three months to answer me

combien de temps met-on pour y aller? how long does it take to get there?

nous y mettrons le temps/le prix qu'il faudra we'll spend as much time/money as we have to

tu as mis le temps! (familier) you took your time about it!, you took long enough!

tu en a mis du temps pour te décider! you took some time to make up your mind!

mettre de l'argent dans une voiture to put money in ou into a car

11. [écrire] to put

on met un accent sur le "e" "e" takes an accent

on met deux m à "pomme" "pomme" has two m's

mets qu'il a refusé de signer (familier) write ou put down that he refused to sign

12. [supposer]

mettons (let's) say

et mettons que tu gagnes? suppose ou let's say you win?

il faut, mettons, 2 mètres de tissu we need, (let's) say ou shall we say, 2 metres of material

mettons que j'ai mal compris! [acceptation] let's just say I got it wrong!

13. [donner] to give

je vous mets un peu plus de la livre I've put in a bit more than a pound

le prof m'a mis 18 ≃ the teacher gave me an A

14. (familier) [infliger]

qu'est-ce qu'il m'a mis au ping-pong! he really hammered me ou he didn't half thrash me at table tennis!

on leur a mis 5 buts en première mi-temps we hammered in 5 goals against them in the first half

je lui ai mis une bonne claque I gave ou landed him a good clout

qu'est-ce que son père va lui mettre! his father is really going to give it to him!

15. (locution)

on les met! (très familier) let's split! (très familier)

va te faire mettre! (vulgaire) up yours! (très familier)

————————

se mettre verbe pronominal (emploi passif)

1. [dans une position, un endroit - chose] to go

où se mettent les tasses? where do the cups go?

les pieds, ça ne se met pas sur la table! tables aren't made to put your feet on!

2. [aller - vêtement] to go

le noir se met avec tout black goes with everything

————————

se mettre verbe pronominal intransitif

1. [s'installer, s'établir - dans une position]

se mettre debout to stand up

se mettre sur le dos to lie (down) on one's back

mets-toi près de la fenêtre

a. [debout] stand near the window

b. [assis] sit near the window

mettez-vous en cercle arrange yourselves into ou form a circle

je me mets dehors pour travailler I go outside to work

mettez-vous dans la position du lotus get into the lotus position

2. [entrer - dans un état, une situation]

ne te mets pas dans un tel état! don't get (yourself) into such a state!

se mettre en rage to get into a rage

il s'est mis dans une position difficile he's got ou put himself in a difficult situation

3. [s'habiller]

se mettre en to put on

se mettre en pantalon to put on a pair of trousers

elle se met toujours en jupe she always wears a skirt

4. [s'unir]

se mettre avec quelqu'un

a. [pour un jeu] to team up with somebody

b. [pour vivre] to move in with somebody

c. [dans une discussion] to side with somebody

on s'est tous mis ensemble pour acheter le cadeau we all clubbed together to buy the present

on s'est mis par équipes de 6 we split up into ou we formed teams of 6 (people)

ils ont dû s'y mettre à 4 pour porter le buffet it took 4 of them to carry the dresser

5. (locution)

qu'est-ce qu'ils se mettent!

a. (très familier) [dans un combat, un débat] they're really having a go at each other!

b. [en mangeant] they're really getting stuck in!

————————

se mettre verbe pronominal transitif

to put on (separable)

se mettre une belle robe/du parfum to put on a nice dress/some perfume

————————

se mettre à verbe pronominal plus préposition

1. [passer à]

quand le feu se met au rouge when the lights turn ou go red

MÉTÉOROLOGIE

le temps se met au beau it's turning sunny

le temps se met au froid it's getting ou turning cold

2. [commencer]

se mettre au judo to take up judo

se mettre à l'ouvrage to set to work, to get down to work

voilà qu'il se met à pleuvoir! now it's started to rain ou raining!

s'y mettre

a. [au travail] to get down to it

b. [à une activité nouvelle] to have a try

si tu t'y mets aussi, je renonce! if you join in as well, I give up!

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > mettre

6 AT

I) prep.

A. with dative.

I. Of motion;

1) towards, against;

Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;

hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;

2) close atup to;

Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;

þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;

3) to, at;

koma at landi, to come to land;

ganga at dómi, to go into court;

4) along (= eptir);

ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;

dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;

refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;

5) denoting hostility;

renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;

gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;

6) around;

vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;

bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;

7) denoting business, engagement;

ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;

fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.

II. Of position, &c.;

1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;

at kirkju, at church;

at dómi, in court;

at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;

2) denoting participation in;

vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;

vera at vígi, to be an accessory in man-slaying;

3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;

kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;

var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;

4) with proper names of places (farms);

konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;

biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;

at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;

5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;

at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;

at Marðar, at Mara’s home;

at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;

at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).

III. Of time;

1) at, in;

at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;

at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;

at páskum, at Easter;

at kveldi, at eventide;

at þinglausnum, at the close of the Assembly;

at fjöru, at the ebb;

at flœðum, at the floodtide;

2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;

at ári komanda, next year;

at vári, er kemr, next spring;

generally with ‘komanda’ understood;

at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;

3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;

at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;

at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;

at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;

at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;

at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;

at honum önduðum, after his death;

4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;

hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;

skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;

at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.

IV. fig. and in various uses;

1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;

brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;

verða at ormi, to become a snake;

2) for, as;

gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;

eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;

3) by;

taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;

draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;

kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;

4) as regards as to;

auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;

vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;

5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;

ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;

6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;

faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);

aðili at sök = aðili sakar;

7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;

hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;

mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;

tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;

kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;

8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;

Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);

þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;

hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;

9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);

at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;

at landslögum, by the law of the land;

at vánum, as was to be expected;

at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;

10) in adverbial phrases;

gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;

bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;

at fullu, fully;

at vísu, surely;

at frjálsu, freely;

at eilífu, for ever and ever;

at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;

at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;

at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.

B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);

sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;

eiga féránsdóm at e-n, to hold a court of execution upon a person;

at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;

connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;

at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.

II)

1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;

at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;

2) in an objective sense;

hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;

gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;

3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).

III)

1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;

hón grét at meir, she wept the more;

þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;

þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;

2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);

þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;

sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.

IV)

conj., that;

1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;

þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;

vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;

2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;

svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;

3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);

4) since, because, as (= því at);

5) connected with þó, því, svá;

þó at (with subj.), though, although;

því at, because, for;

svá at, so that;

6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;

þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;

þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;

áðr at (= á. en), before;

7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;

Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;

in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.

V)

negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.

VI)

n. an incited conflict or fight ( see etja);

odda at, Yggs at, battle.

* * *

1.

and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.

Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.

WITH DAT.

A. LOC.

I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:

1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.

2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.

3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)

4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.

5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.

β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.

6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.

β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.

γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.

7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.

β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.

8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.

β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.

II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.

2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.

3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:

α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.

β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.

γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.

4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.

5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.

6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.

β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.

γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.

7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.

B. TEMP.

I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.

II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.

β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.

III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:

1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,

2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.

IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:

1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.

2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.

3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.

V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.

2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.

C. METAPH. and in various cases:

I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:

α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.

β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.

II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.

2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.

III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.

IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.

2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)

3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.

4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.

5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.

6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.

β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.

V. denoting the source of a thing:

1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.

2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.

VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.

VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.

VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.

β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.

IX. following many words:

1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.

β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …

γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.

δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.

2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.

3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.

WITH ACC.

TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.

☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.

2.

and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.

I. it is used either,

1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,

2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.

β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).

3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.

II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:

α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.

β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.

γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.

δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.

ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.

ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.

η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.

θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.

3.

and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.

I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.

II. it is used,

1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.

2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.

β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.

γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.

III. used in connection with conjunctions,

1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.

α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.

β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.

γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.

2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.

IV. as a relat. conj.:

1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.

2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.

V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.

4.

and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.

5.

n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.

β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.

6.

the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

7 joindre

joindre [ʒwɛ̃dʀ]

➭ TABLE 49

1. transitive verb

   a. ( = contacter) to get in touch with

• essayez de le joindre par téléphone try to get in touch with him by phone

   b. ( = ajouter) to add (à to ) ; ( = inclure) to enclose (à with)

• pièce jointe [de lettre] enclosure ; (Computing) attachment

   c. ( = mettre ensemble, relier) to join

• joindre deux tables to put two tables together

• les mains jointes with his (or her etc) hands together

   d. ( = combiner) to combine

• joindre l'utile à l'agréable to combine business with pleasure

• joindre les deux bouts (inf) to make ends meet

2. intransitive verb

• la fenêtre joint mal the window doesn't shut properly

3. reflexive verb

► se joindre

• se joindre à to join

• voulez-vous vous joindre à nous ? would you like to join us?

• se joindre à la discussion to join in the discussion

• mon mari se joint à moi pour vous exprimer notre sympathie my husband joins me in offering our sympathy

* * *
ʒwɛ̃dʀ
1.

verbe transitif

1) ( communiquer avec) to get hold of [personne]

joindre quelqu'un au téléphone — to get somebody on the phone

2) ( ajouter) (dans une lettre, un paquet) to enclose [timbre, chèque] (à with); (en agrafant, fixant) to attach (à to); ( par courrier électronique) to attach [fichier] (à to)

joindre sa voix au concert de protestations — to add one's voice to the chorus of protest

3) ( relier) [rue, pont, passage]

joindre quelque chose à quelque chose — to link something with something

4) ( mettre ensemble) to put [something] together [planches, tôles]

joindre les pieds — to put one's feet together

2.

se joindre verbe pronominal

1) ( se mêler)

se joindre à — to join [personne, groupe]; to join with [parti]; to mix with [sentiment, émotion]

toute la famille se joint à moi pour vous souhaiter une bonne année — all the family join me in wishing you a happy New Year

se joindre à la conversation — to join in the conversation

2) ( s'unir) [lèvres] to meet; [mains] to join

••

joindre les deux bouts — (colloq) to make ends meet

* * *
ʒwɛ̃dʀ
1. vt

1) (à une lettre) to enclose

Je joins mon curriculum vitae. — I enclose my CV.

2) [fichier] to attach

joindre qch à — to enclose sth with

3) (= contacter) to reach, to get hold of

Vous pouvez le joindre chez lui. — You can reach him at home.

4) (mettre bout à bout, ensemble) to join, to put together

On va joindre les deux tables. — We're going to put the two tables together.

joindre les mains — to put one's hands together

joindre les talons — to put one's heels together

joindre les deux bouts fig — to make ends meet

5) (= combiner)

joindre qch à qch — to combine sth with sth

joindre l'utile à l'agréable — to combine business with pleasure

2. vi

[volets, éléments] to fit properly

Ces planches joignent mal. — These planks don't fit properly.

* * *

joindre verb table: joindre

A vtr

1 ( communiquer avec) to reach, to get hold of [personne]; chercher à joindre qn to try to reach ou get hold of sb; joindre qn au téléphone to get sb on the phone;

2 ( ajouter) (dans une lettre, un paquet) to enclose [timbre, chèque] (à with); (en agrafant, fixant) to attach (à to); ( par courrier électronique) to attach [fichier] (à to); je joins un cadeau/livre à mon envoi I am sending a gift/book as well; les avantages joints à l'emploi the advantages that come with the job; joindre sa voix au concert de protestations to add one's voice to the chorus of protest;

3 ( relier) [rue, pont, passage] to link, to join (à with); joindre qch à qch to link sth with sth;

4 ( allier) joindre qch à qch to combine sth with sth; joindre l'intelligence à la simplicité to combine intelligence with simplicity;

5 ( mettre ensemble) to join, to put [sth] together [planches, tôles]; joindre les pieds to put one's feet together; joindre deux objets bout à bout to put two things end to end; joindre des plaques de métal par une soudure to weld sheets of metal together;

6 Jur [tribunal, juge] to combine [procès, course].

B vi ( coïncider) [planche] to fit properly; [fenêtre, porte] to shut ou close properly.

C se joindre vpr

1 ( se mêler) se joindre à to join [personne, famille, groupe]; to join with [mouvement, groupe, parti]; to mix with [sentiment, émotion]; toute la famille se joint à moi pour vous souhaiter une bonne année all the family join me in wishing you a happy New Year; se joindre à la foule to mix ou mingle with the crowd; se joindre à la conversation to join in the conversation;

2 ( s'unir) [lèvres] to meet; [mains] to join.

Idiome

joindre les deux bouts○ to make ends meet.

[jwɛ̃dr] verbe transitif

1. [attacher - ficelles, bâtons] to join (together), to put together ; [ - câbler] to join, to connect

joindre les deux bouts to make ends meet

2. [rapprocher] to put ou to bring together

joindre les mains [pour prier] to clasp one's hands, to put one's hands together

3. [points, lieux] to link

4. [ajouter]

joindre quelque chose à to add something to

joindre un fichier à un message électronique INFORMATIQUE to attach a file to an email message

je joins à ce pli un chèque de 300 euros please find enclosed a cheque for 300 euros

voulez-vous joindre une carte aux fleurs? would you like to send a card with ou to attach a card to the flowers?

5. [associer] to combine, to link

joindre la technique à l'efficacité to combine technical know-how and efficiency

6. [contacter] to contact, to get in touch with

joindre quelqu'un par téléphone to get through to somebody on the phone, to contact somebody by phone

joindre quelqu'un par lettre to contact somebody in writing

où pourrai-je vous joindre? how can I get in touch with you ou contact you?

————————

[jwɛ̃dr] verbe intransitif

[porte, planches, battants]

des volets qui joignent bien/mal shutters that close/don't close properly

————————

se joindre verbe pronominal (emploi réciproque)

1. [se contacter - par téléphone] to get through to each other ; [ - par lettre] to make contact

2. [se nouer]

leurs mains se sont jointes their hands came together ou joined

————————

se joindre à verbe pronominal plus préposition

[s'associer à] to join

tu veux te joindre à nous? would you like to come with us?

se joindre à une conversation/partie de rami to join in a conversation/game of rummy

puis-je me joindre à vous pour acheter le cadeau de Pierre? may I join in to (help) buy Pierre's present?

Lisa se joint à moi pour vous souhaiter la bonne année Lisa and I wish you ou Lisa joins me in wishing you a Happy New Year

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > joindre

8 Historical Portugal

   Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.

   A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.

   Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140

   The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."

   In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.

   The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.

   Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385

   Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in

   Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.

   The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.

   Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580

   The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.

   The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.

   What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.

   By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.

   Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.

   The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.

   By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.

   In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.

   Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640

   Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.

   Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.

   On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.

   Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822

   Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.

   Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.

   In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the

   Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.

   Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.

   Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.

   Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910

   During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.

   Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.

   Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.

   Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.

   Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.

   As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.

   First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26

   Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.

   The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.

   Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.

   The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74

   During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."

   Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.

   For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),

   and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.

   The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.

   With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.

   During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.

   The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.

   At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.

   The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.

   Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76

   Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.

   Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.

   In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.

   In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.

   In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.

   The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until

   UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.

   Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000

   After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.

   From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.

   Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.

   Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.

   In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.

   In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.

   Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.

    Contemporary Portugal

   Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.

   The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.

   Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.

   Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).

   All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.

   The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.

   After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.

   Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.

   Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.

   From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.

   Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.

   In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.

   An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

9 φέρω

φέρω ([dialect] Locr. [full] φάρω [ᾰ], IG9(1).334.5 (Oeanthea, v. B.C.)), only [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. (late 1 [tense] aor. [ per.] 3pl.

A ἤφεραν IG3.1379
), Il.21.458, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, [ per.] 2pl. imper. φέρτε Il.9.171
; [ per.] 2sg. subj. φέρῃσθα Call.Dian. 144
; [ per.] 3sg. subj. φέρῃσι Il.18.308
, Od.5.164, al.; [dialect] Ep. inf. φερέμεν Il.9.411
, al.: [tense] impf. ἔφερον, [dialect] Ep. φέρον 3.245
; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον ([ per.] 3pl.), Od.9.429, 10.108.

II [tense] fut. οἴσω Il.7.82
, etc.; [dialect] Dor. οἰσῶ Theoc.3.11
; [ per.] 1pl. οἰσεῦμες Id.15.133
; [ per.] 3pl. ηοίσοντι Tab.Heracl.1.150: the foll. act. forms are not [tense] fut. in sense, imper. οἶσε Od.22.106
, 481, Ar.Ach. 1099, 1101, 1122, Ra. 482; οἰσέτω Il.19.173
, Od.8.255; [ per.] 3pl. οἰσόντων Antim.15
; inf. οἴσειν Pi.P.4.102
, [dialect] Ep. οἰσέμεν Od.3.429
, οἰσέμεναι Il.3.120
, Od.8.399, etc.: [tense] aor. 1 inf. οἶσαι Ph.1.611
codd. ( ἀν-οῖσαι is prob. in Hdt.1.157):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. οἴσομαι Il.22.217
, S.El. 969, etc. (in pass. sense, E.Or. 440, X.Oec.18.6; so [dialect] Dor. οἰσεῖται Archim.Fluit.1.7
, al.): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass. οἰσθήσομαι D.44.45
, Arist. Ph. 205a13, Archim.Fluit.1.3, al., ([etym.] ἐξ-) E.Supp. 561:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. προοῖσται Luc.Par.2
; cf. οἰστέον, οἰστός ([etym.] ἀν-οιστός).

III from ἐνεγκ- (not found in Hom. or Hdt., exc. as v.l. in Il.19.194, but in Pi.O.13.66, I.8(7).21, ([etym.] προς-) Id.P.9.36, also B.16.62, and normal in [dialect] Att. and Trag., also in codd.Hp., Epid.1.1.2, al.) come [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεγκα, and [tense] aor. 2 ἤνεγκον:—Indic., [ per.] 1sg. ἤνεγκον S.OC 521
(lyr.), 964, Ar.Ra. 1299, Th. 742, Lys. 944, ([etym.] δι-) Isoc.18.59, but ἤνεγκα S.El. 13
, E. Ion38, Aeschin.2.4, and in compos. with Preps.; [ per.] 2sg. always ἤνεγκας Ar.Av. 540
(lyr.), ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.Tr. 741 (in Ar.Th. 742, δέκα μῆνας αὔτ' ἐγὼ ἤνεγκον is answd. by ἤνεγκας σύ;); [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεγκε, common to both forms; dual δι-ηνεγκάτην Pl.Lg. 723b
; pl. always ἠνέγκαμεν, -ατε, -αν ([ per.] 3pl. ἀπ-ήνενκαν IG22.1620.37
, al., once ἀπ-ήνεγκον ib. 1414.2; δι-ηνέγκομεν is f.l. in X.Oec.9.8): imper., [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεγκε E. Heracl. 699
, Ar.Eq. 110, X.Mem.3.6.9 ( ἔνεγκον cj. Pors. in Anaxipp. 8); [ per.] 3sg. ἐνεγκάτω Ar. Pax 1149
(troch.), Th. 238, Pl.Phd. 116d, ([etym.] προς-) X.Smp.5.2; but ἐξ-ενεγκέτω IG12.63.33
, 76.61; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεγκόντω ib.5 (1).26.16 (Amyclae, ii/i B. C.); [ per.] 2pl. ἐξ-ενέγκατε Ar.Ra. 847
: subj. ἐνέγκω common to both forms: opt., [ per.] 1sg. ἐνέγκαιμι E.Hipp. 393
, Pl.Cri. 43c: [ per.] 3sg. ἐνέγκαι (cod.A, but - κοι cod.Laur.) S.Tr. 774, but ἐνέγκοι Id.Fr.84
(anap.), Pl.R. 330a, ([etym.] ξυν-) Th.6.20, etc.; [ per.] 2pl. ἐνέγκαιτε ( ἐνέγκατε codd.) E.Heracl. 751 (lyr.): inf. ἐνεγκεῖν A.Supp. 766
, S.OC 1599, IG22.40.18, etc., ([etym.] προς-) Pi.P.9.36, Hp.VM15; Hellenistic ἐνέγκαι Arist.Oec. 1349a27
([etym.] εἰς-), PAmh.2.30.35 (ii B. C.), Ev.Marc. 2.4 ([etym.] προς-), etc., found also in codd.Hp., Aff.3 ([etym.] προς-), Nat.Mul.19 ([etym.] δι-): part. ἐνεγκών Pi.I.8(7).21
, S.El. 692, Th.6.56, etc., ἐνέγκας IG22.1361.21
([etym.] εἰς-), 333.4, D.49.51 (and later, Demetr.Com.Nov.1.10 ([etym.] εἰς-), Arist.Oec. 1351a14, etc.; in X. we find ἐξ-ενεγκόντες Mem.1.2.53
, and δι-ενεγκοῦσα, συν-ενεγκόντες, vv. ll. in ib.2.2.5, An.6.5.6):— [voice] Med., only ἠνεγκάμην, Ar.Ec.76 ([etym.] ἐξ-), etc. (exc. imper. ἐνεγκοῦ S.OC 470
); [ per.] 2sg. ἠνέγκω E.Supp. 583
, X.Oec.7.13; [ per.] 3sg. ἠνέγκατο S.Tr. 462
, Pl.R. 406b, etc.; [ per.] 1pl. ἠνεγκάμεθα Id. Ion 530b
, ([etym.] προ-) Phlb. 57a; inf. εἰς-ενέγκασθαι Isoc.15.188
: part. ἐνεγκάμενος Aeschin.1.131
, ([etym.] ἀπ-) X.Ages.6.2.

IV from ἐνεικ- comes [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεικα, found mostly in [dialect] Ion. (but not in codd. Hp.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr., also at Cos (v. infr.) and implied elsewh. in pass. forms (v. infr. v):—the endings are those of [tense] aor. 1, exc. in imper. ἔνεικε Od.21.178
, inf. ἐνεικέμεν (v.l. ἐνεγκέμεν) Il.19.194, ἐνείκην (v. infr.), and part. μετ-ενεικών, ἐξενικοῦσι (v. infr.), cf. συνενείκομαι:—[ per.] 1sg. ἀν-ένεικα Od.11.625
; [ per.] 2sg. ἀπ-ένεικας Il.14.255
; [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεικε Od.18.300
, al., Hdt.2.146, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικε Il.15.705
, al.; [ per.] 1pl. ἐνείκαμεν Od.24.43
; [ per.] 3pl. ἤνεικαν Hdt.3.30
, [dialect] Ep. ἔνεικαν Il.9.306
; imper. [ per.] 2sg. ἔνεικον Anacr.62.3
; [ per.] 2pl., ἐνείκατε Od. 8.393
; [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεικάντων Schwyzer 688
B 3 (Chios, v B. C.); inf. ἐνεῖκαι Il.18.334
, Pi.P.9.53, Hdt.1.32; ἐνεικέμεν (v. supr.); [dialect] Aeol. ἐνείκην Alc.Oxy.1788
Fr.15ii 20; part. ἐνείκας Il.17.39
, ([etym.] ἀν-) Hdt.2.23; μετ-ενεικών Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).22
(Cos, iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., [ per.] 3sg. ἀν-ενείκατο Il.19.314
; [ per.] 3pl. ἠνείκαντο 9.127
, Hdt.1.57, ([etym.] ἐς-) 7.152; part. ἐνεικάμενος Alc.35.4
.

2 [tense] aor. 1 ἤνῐκα is found in the foll. dialect forms: [ per.] 3sg. ἤνικε IG42(1).121.110
(Epid., iv B. C.); ἤνικεν SIG239
Bi11 (Delph., iv B. C.); ἀν-ήνικε IG4.757A12
, al. (Troezen, ii B. C.); ἀπ-ήνικε ib.42(1).103.16, al. (Epid., iv B. C.); but ἤνῑκε is prob. written for ἤνεικε in IG4.801.3 (Troezen, vi B. C.); [ per.] 1pl. ἀν-ηνίκαμες [ῐ] GDI 3591b21 ([place name] Calymna); [ per.] 3pl. ἤνικαν SIG239
Bi 17 (Delph., iv B. C.), IG 12(2).15.15 (Mytil., iii B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐνίκει Berl.Sitzb.1927.161
([place name] Cyrene); ἐς-ενίκη, and inf. ἐς-ένικαι, IG12(2).645b43,39 (Nesus, iv B. C.); part. (dat. pl.) ἐξ-ενικοῦσι IG4.823.49
(Troezen, iv B. C.); so in later Gr., εἰς-ήνικα Supp.Epigr.7.381
,382 (Dura-Europos, iii A. D.); ἤνιγκα ib.383 (ibid., iii A. D.):—[voice] Med., part. ἐξ-ε[νικ]άμενος IG12
(2).526a5 (Eresus, iv B. C.).

b [dialect] Boeot. [tense] aor. 1 in [ per.] 3pl. εἴνιξαν IG7.2418.24
(Thebes, iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ἤνειγξα Hdn.Gr.2.374.

V other tenses: [tense] pf. ἐνήνοχα D.21.108
, 22.62, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Luc.Pr.Im.15,17, ([etym.] μετ-) Pl.Criti. 113a, ([etym.] συν-) v. l. in X.Mem.3.5.22:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. ἐνεχθήσομαι Arist.Ph. 205b12
, Archim.Fluit.2.2, al., ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.7.56, ([etym.] κατ-) Isoc.13.19: [tense] aor. ἠνέχθην X.An.4.7.12
and freq. in compds.; [dialect] Ion. ἀπ-ηνείχθην Hdt.1.66
, etc.; ([etym.] περι-) ib.84; [ per.] 3pl. written ἠνείχτθησαν in Schwyzer 707B9 (Ephesus, vi B. C.); [dialect] Dor. part. ἐξ-ενειχθείς IG42(1).121.115
(Epid., iv B. C.); Hellenistic ἐνεγχθείς PCair.Zen.327.42
(iii B. C.), ([etym.] συμπερι-) IPE12.32A31,78, B70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); in dialects, [ per.] 3sg. indic. ἀπ-ηνίχθη IG42(1).103.111
(Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐξενιχθῇ ib.12(5).593 A23 (Ceos, v B. C.), Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).21 (Cos, iii B. C.); [dialect] Boeot. ἐν-ενιχθεῖ IG7.3172.150
(Thespiae, iii B. C.); part. (neut.) ἐπ-ενιχθέν Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).53
(Telos, iv B. C., ined.); [dialect] Att. [tense] pf. ἐνήνεγμαι, ἐνήνεκται Pl.R. 584d
, εἰς-ενήνεκται E. Ion 1340
; ἀν-ενήνεγκται IG12.91.4
; ἐπαν-ενήνειγκται ib.22.1607a7; [dialect] Ion. ἐξ-ενηνειγμένος Hdt.8.37
; [dialect] Att. [tense] plpf. προς-ενήνεκτο X.HG4.3.20
; part. κατ-, μετ-ενηνεγμένος Plb.10.30.2
, Str.13.1.12. (With φέρω cf. Lat.fero, OE. beran, Skt. bhárati 'bear'; οἴσω is of uncertain origin; ἐνεγκ- is prob. redupl. ἐγκ- ( ἐνεκ- in [voice] Pass. forms and in δουρηνεκής, etc.), cogn. with Skt. náśati 'attain,' Lat. nanciscor, Lith. nèšti 'carry, bear'; ἐνεικ- ([etym.] ἐνῐκ-) is of uncertain origin; the glosses ἐνέεικαν· ἤνεγκαν, and ἐνεείκω· ἐνέγκω (Hsch.) are not corroborated.)

A [voice] Act.,

I bear or carry a load, ἐν ταλάροισι φέρον μελιηδέα καρπόν Il.18.568
; μέγα ἔργον, ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
; ἦγον μὲν μῆλα, φέρον δ' εὐήνορα οἶνον Od.4.622
; χοάς A.Ch.15
; φ. ἐπ' ὤμοις S.Tr. 564
; χερσὶν φ. Id.Ant. 429
; φ. ὅπλα βραχίονι E.Hec.14
; bear (as a device) on one's shield, A.Th. 559, etc.; γαστέρι κοῦρον φ., of a pregnant woman, Il.6.59; φ. ὑπὸ ζώνην or ζώνης ὕπο, A.Ch. 1000(992), E.Hec. 762: in Trag. stronger than ἔχω, ἁγνὰς αἵματος χεῖρας φ. to have hands clean from blood, E.Hipp. 316 (v.l. φορεῖς) ; ἀλαὸν ὄμμα φέρων Id.Ph. 1531
(lyr.); γλῶσσαν εὔφημον φ. A.Ch. 581
, cf. Supp. 994; καλὸν φ. στόμα S.Fr. 930
codd. (nisi leg. φορῇ) ; ἄψοφον βάσιν φ. Id.Tr. 967
(lyr.).

II bear, convey, with collat. notion of motion, freq. in Hom., πῇ δὴ.. τόξα φέρεις; Od.21.362
; πρόσω φ. ib. 369; εἴσω φέρω σ' ἐντεῦθεν Ar.V. 1444
, cf. Pl.Lg. 914b; πόδες φέρον Il.6.514
; πέδιλα τά μιν φέρον 24.341
, etc.; of horses, 2.838; ἵππω.. ἅρμα οἴσετον 5.232
, etc.; of ships, Od.16.323, cf. Il.9.306; τὰ σώματα τῶν ζῴων συνέστηκεν ἐκ τοῦ φέροντος καὶ τοῦ φερομένου Diocl. Fr.17
.

b of persons, bring to bear, μένος or μένος χειρῶν ἰθύς τινος φέρειν hurl one's strength right upon or against him, Il.16.602, 5.506; φ. τὴν ὀργήν, τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπί τινα, Plb.21.31.8, 33.11.2.

c lead, direct, τὴν πόλιν Plu.Luc.6
.

2 of wind, bear along, [πνοιὴ Ζεφύρου] φ. νῆάς τε καὶ αὐτούς Od.10.26
; [σχεδίην] ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα 5.330
, cf. 4.516, Il.19.378, etc.; ἐπέλασσε φέρων ἄνεμος Od.3.300
, 7.277, cf. 5.111, etc.: abs., ὁ βορέας ἔξω τοῦ Πόντου εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, X.An.5.77: metaph., ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φ. Pl.R. 394d
; φ. τινὰ φρένες δύσαρκτοι A.Ch. 1023
, cf. Th. 687 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., v. infr. B.

III endure, suffer, λυγρά Od.18.135
; ἄτην Hdt.1.32
; χαλινόν, ζυγόν, A.Ag. 1066, 1226; πημονάς, τύχας, Id.Pers. 293, E.Or. 1024; ξυμφοράς Th.2.60
; τὰς οὐ προσηκούσας ἁμαρτίας Antipho 3.2.10
; also of food, ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φ. X.Cyr.8.2.21
; of strong wine, bear, admit, καὶ τὰ τρία φέρων καλῶς, i.e. three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσῳ, Ar.Eq. 1188, cf. Ach. 354; so τὰς ἐπιδείξεις.. φέρουσιν αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἰσοκράτους) οἱ λόγοι, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ἐκκλησίαις.. ἀγῶνας οὐχ ὑπομένουσι D.H.Isoc.2
: metaph., ᾗ φέρειν πέφυκε Pl.Ti. 48a
.

2 freq. with modal words, πήματα κόσμῳ φ. Pi.P.3.82
; σιγῇ κακά E.Hec. 738
; ὀργῇ τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.31
; θυμῷ φ. Id.5.80
; χαρᾷ φ. τι J.AJ19.1.13
: esp. with an Adv., [ὕβριν] ῥηϊδίως φ. Hes.Op. 215
; δεινῶς, βαρέως, πικρῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, bear a thing impatiently, take it ill or amiss, Hdt.2.121.γ, 5.19, E. Ion 610, Pl.R. 330a, etc.; δυσπετῶς, βαρυστόνως φ., A.Pr. 752, Eu. 794; προθύμως φέρειν τὸν πόλεμον to be zealous about the war, Hdt.9.18,40; προθύμως τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἔφερον Th.8.36
; αἶσαν φέρειν ὡς ῥᾷστα A.Pr. 104
; συμφορὴν ὡς κουφότατα φ. Hdt.1.35
; ῥᾳδίως φ. Pl.Grg. 522d
, al.; εὐπετῶς φ. S.Fr. 585
, X.Mem.2.1.6; εὐπόρως ( εὐφόρως Brunck) ἐνεγκεῖν S.Ph. 873
; εὐμενῶς, εὐχερῶς φ., D.Ep. 3.45, Pl.R. 474e; these phrases are used mostly c. acc. rei; also c. part., βαρέως ἤνεικε ἰδών Hdt.3.155
, cf. Ar.Th. 385, etc.; φ. ἐλαφρῶς.. λαβόντα ζυγόν Pi.P.2.93
; ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων Pl. Phd. 63a
: c. gen., τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς χαλεπώτερον φ. Th.1.77
, cf. 2.62; ἐπί τινι, χαλεπῶς φ. ἐπὶ τῇ πολιορκίᾳ X.HG7.4.21
, cf. Isoc.12.232; πράως ἐπὶ τοῖς γιγνομένοις φ. D.58.55
: c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι, τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ, X.An.1.3.3, HG3.4.9, cf. 5.1.29; later, χαλεπῶς φ. διά τι, πρός τι, D.S.17.111, Jul.Or.1.17c codd.

IV bring, fetch, εἰ.. θεὸς αὐτὸν ἐνείκαι Od.21.196
; φ. ἄποινα Il.24.502
; ἄρνε 3
, 120, cf. Sapph.95; ὕδωρ, οἶνον, Anacr.62.1; ἔντεα Il.18.191
; τόξα Od.21.359
; κνημῖδας A.Th. 675
; δᾷδα Ar.Nu. 1490
, etc.; γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Hdt.7.131
:—[voice] Med., carry or bring with one, or for one's own use, ποδάνιπτρα Od.19.504
; οἶνον Alc.35
, cf. Hdt.4.67, 7.50, X. Mem.3.14.1; φερνὰς δόμοις E.Andr. 1282
; fetch, Od.2.410; χοὰς ἐκ κρήνης S.OC 470
.

2 bring, offer, present, δῶρα Od.8.428
, etc.; μέλος Pi.P.2.3
; χοάς τινι A.Ch. 487
; φ. πέπλον δώρημά τινι S.Tr. 602
; πρός τινα δῶρα X.An.7.3.31
; χάριν τινὶ φ. grant any one a favour, do him a kindness, Il.5.211, Od.5.307, al.; ἐπὶ ἦρα φ. τινί Il.1.572
, Od.3.164, etc.; φ. τισὶ εὐνοίας, ὄνησιν ἀστοῖς, A.Supp. 489, S.OC 287; but after Hom., χάριν τινὶ φ. show gratitude to him, Pi.O.10(11).17; μῆνιν φ. τινί cherish wrath against.. A.Niob. in PSI11.1208.12.

b = ἄγω iv. 1, ἄχρι νῦν καθ' ὥραν ἔτους λέγονται πένθος ἐπὶ Μελεάγρῳ φέρειν Ant.Lib.2.7
; Ἰάλεμος· ὁ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀπολωλόσιν ἀνίαν φέρων, Suid.:—[voice] Med., τοῦ γονέως ἐφ' ᾧ γε τὸ πένθος φέρεσθε Phalar.Ep.103.1
.

3 bring, produce, cause, [ἀστὴρ] φέρει πυρετὸν βροτοῖσιν Il.22.31
; ὄσσαν.. ἥ τε φ. κλέος ἀνθρώποισι Od.1.283
, cf. 3.204; φ. κακόν, πῆμα, ἄλγεα, etc., work one woe, Il.8.541, Od.12.231, 427, etc.; δηϊοτῆτα φ. bring war, 6.203; ἐπ' ἀλλήλοισι φ. Ἄρηα Il.3.132
, cf. 8.516; πόλεμον Hes.Sc. 150
; θάνατον φ. B.5.134
; τοῦτο εὐδοξίαν σοι οἴσει Pl.Ep. 312c
; τὸ σωθῆναι τὸ ψεῦδος φέρει S.Ph. 109
; τέχναι.. φόβον φέρουσιν μαθεῖν A.Ag. 1135
(lyr.); ὥσπερ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε as justice brought with it, brought about, i.e. as was just, no more than just, Hdt.5.58; ἀν' ὄ κα φέρῃ ὁ λόγος ὁ ταμία Φιλοκλέος IG42(1).77.13
(Epid., ii B. C.); of a calculation, yield a result, Vett.Val.349.27; produce, adduce, bring forward, παραδείγματα Isoc.7.6
, etc.; πάσας αἰτίας D.58.22
; ἁρμόττουσαν εἰκόνα Id.61.10
:—[voice] Pass., εἰς τὴν συνηγορίαν.. τοιαῦτά τινα φέρεται Sor.2.3
.

b bring or carry with one, involve, τὸ πᾶν ἡμῖν τοῦ πολέμου φέρουσιν αἱ νέες Hdt.8.62
; οὐ ξύλων ἀγὼν ὁ τὸ πᾶν φέρων ἐστὶ ἡμῖν, ἀλλ' ἀνδρῶν ib. 100.

4 μῦθον φ. τινί bring one word, Il.10.288, 15.202; ἀγγελίην φ. bring a message, ib. 175, Od.1.408; λόγον Pi.P.8.38
; ἐπιστολὰς φ. τινί S.Aj. 781
, cf. Tr. 493; ἐπιστολήν X.Ages.8.3
: hence, tell, announce, πευθώ, φάτιν, A.Th. 370, Ag.9; σαφές τι πρᾶγος Id.Pers. 248
(troch.), cf. Ag. 639, etc.; report, ἀγήν (breakages) PCair.Zen. 15r27 (iii B. C.); φ. κεχωνευκώς reports that he has.., ib.741.26, cf. 147.4, 268.24 (all iii B. C.); enter, book a payment made, PBaden47.12:—[voice] Med., λόγους φ. E.Supp. 583
; but also ἀγγελίας ἔπος οἴσῃ thou shalt have it brought thee, receive, Id.Ph. 1546 (lyr.); μαντήϊα.. φέρονται Hes.Fr.134.9
:—[voice] Pass., θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the testator must be announced, Ep.Heb.9.16.

5 pay something due or owing, φόρον τέσσαρα τάλαντα φ. pay as a tax or tribute, Th.4.57, cf. IG12.57.9, Pl.Plt. 298a, PCair.Zen.467.7 (iii B. C.); δασμόν X.An.5.5.10
; σύνοδον φ. subscribe to the expense of a meeting, IG22.1012.14, 1326.6; χρήματα πᾶσι τάξαντες φ. Th.1.19
; μισθὸν φ. X.Cyr.1.6.12
(but usu., receive, draw, pay, μισθὸν δύο δραχμὰς τῆς ἡμέρας Ar.Ach.66
; τέτταρας τῆς ἡμέρας ὀβολοὺς φέρων Men.357
; αἱ νῆες μισθὸν ἔφερον Th. 3.17
, cf. X.An.1.3.21, Oec.1.6); φ. ἐννέα ὀβολοὺς τῆς μνᾶς τόκους Lys.Fr.1.2
, cf. Lycurg.23; also of property, bring in, yield as rent, φ. μίσθωσιν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ Is.5.35
.

6 apply, refer, τι ἐπί τι Pl. Ti. 37e
, Chrm. 163d, R. 478b, cf. Plb.3.36.7, al.; φ. τὰ πράγματα ἐπί τινα confer powers upon, Id.2.50.6.

7 ψῆφον φ. give one's vote, A.Eu. 674, 680, And.1.2, Is.11.18; ψῆφος καθ' ἡμῶν οἴσεται ([voice] Pass.) E.Or. 440; περὶ ταύτης ἡ ψῆφος οἰσθήσεται D.44.45
; ὑπὲρ ἀγῶνος Lycurg.7
, cf. 11: hence φ. τινά appoint or nominate to an office, φ. χορηγόν D.20.130
, 39.7, cf. Pl.Lg. 753d, Arist.Pol. 1266a10:—[voice] Pass., ibid.; ὅπως φέρηται ἐν τῷ στρατιωτικῷ UPZ15.10
(ii B. C.); τῶν φερομένων ἐν Κλεοπάτρᾳ κληρούχων PRein.10.13
, al. (ii B. C.); φερομένου μου ἐν τῇ συνοχῇ since I am enrolled in prison, i.e. am in prison, BGU1821.21 (i B. C.):—[voice] Med., choose, adopt, ταύταν φ. βιοτάν E.Andr. 785
(lyr.).

V bring forth, produce, whether of the earth or of trees, φ. ἄρουρα φάρμακα Od.4.229
; ἄμπελοι φ. οἶνον 9.110
; [νῆσος] φ. ὥρια πάντα ib. 131, cf. Hes.Op. 117; [οὐ] γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε Hdt.6.139
; γύαι φ. βίοτον A.Fr.196.5
, cf. Pi.N.11.41, E.Hec. 593, etc.: abs., bear fruit, be fruitful, εὖτ' ἂν τάδε πάντα φέρῃσι h.Merc.91
; ἡ γῆ ἔφερε ( καρπόν add. codd. quidam) Hdt.5.82; αἱ ἄμπελοι φέρουσιν X.Oec.20.4
; also of living beings, τόπος ἄνδρας φ. Pl.Ti. 24c
; ἤνεγκεν αὐτὸν Λαοδίκεια Philostr. VS1.25.1
;
ἡ ἐνεγκοῦσα
one's country, Hld.2.29
, Lib.Or. 2.66, al., Chor.p.81 B., Lyd.Mag.3.26, dub. in Supp.Epigr.4.439 (Milet.) without Art. (also ἡ ἐνεγκαμένη Jul.Ep. 202
); or Mother Earth, M.Ant.4.48: generally, create, form, Πηνειὸς Τέμπη φ. Philostr.Im.1.25
; [τὰ βρέφη] ἄρχεται φέρειν τοὺς ὀδόντας Aët.4.9
; φ. τοὺς κυνόδοντας Gp.16.1.14
.

VI carry off or away, Κῆρες ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι Il.2.302
; φ. τινὰ ἐκ πόνου 14.429
, 17.718, etc.; of winds, [ἔπος] φέροιεν ἀναρπάξασαι ἄελλαι may the winds sweep away the word, Od.8.409; of a river, Hdt.1.189:—[voice] Med., carry off with one, Od.15.19.

2 carry away as booty or prize, ἔναρα, τεύχεα, Il.6.480, 17.70; αἶγα λέοντε φ. 13.199
; δεῖπνον φ., of Harpies, A.Eu.51; ἐνέχυρα βίᾳ φ. Antipho 6.11
; in the phrase φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν (cf. ἄγω 1.3
), IG12.69.19; φέροντα ἢ ἄγοντα Lex ap.D.23.60; αἴ κα.. ἄγῃ ἢ φέρῃ Leg.Gort.5.37
; ἥρπαζον καὶ ἔφερον Lys.20.17
; κείρων ἢ φέρων IG12(9).90.10
(Tamynae, iv B. C.); αἴ τίς κα.. φέρει τι τῶν ἐν τᾷ ἱαρᾷ γᾷ Tab.Heracl.1.128
; of a divorced wife, αἰ δέ τι ἄλλο φέροι τῶ ἀνδρός, πέντε στατῆρανς καταστασεῖ κὤτι κα φέρῃ αὐτόν Leg.Gort.3.2
; φέρειν alone, rob, plunder, θεῶν ἱερά E.Hec. 804
; ἀλλήλους Th.1.7
; abs., SIG38.23 (Teos, v B. C.):—[voice] Pass., φερόμενοι Βακχῶν ὕπο E.Ba. 759
:—[voice] Med. in same sense, ἔναρα Il.22.245
; πελέκεας οἶκόνδε φ. 23.856
; ἀτερπέα δαῖτα Od.10.124
, cf. 15.378.

3 carry off, gain, esp. by toil or trouble, win, achieve, both [voice] Act. and [voice] Med., ἤ κε φέρῃσι μέγα κράτος ἦ κε φεροίμην Il.18.308
; φέρειν τρίποδα Hes.Op. 657
; τἀπινίκια S.El. 692
; τιμήν Ar. Av. 1278
; τἀριστεῖα, τὰ νικητήρια, Pl.R. 468c, Lg. 657e; πέρα.. οὐδὲν φ. S.OC 651
; ἐκ σοῦ πάντ' ἄνευ φόβου φ. Id.OT 590
; τίς.. πλέον τᾶς εὐδαιμονίας φέρει ἤ .. ; ib. 1190 (lyr.), cf. El. 1088 (lyr.); in bad sense, μείζω τὴν αἰσχύνην φ. Pl.Lg. 671e
: also, receive one's due, φ. χάριν S.OT 764
; ὡς τοῦτό γ' ἔρξας δύο φέρῃ δωρήματα Id.Ph. 117
; μισθὸν φέρειν (v. supr. iv.5); of a priest's perquisites, φέρει ὁ ἱαρεὺς γέρη σκέλη κτλ. BMus.Inscr.968
A 9 ([place name] Cos), cf. IG12.24.10, al., SIG56.35 (Argos, v B. C.):—[voice] Med. (v. ad init.), win for oneself, κῦδος οἴσεσθαι Il.22.217
; δέπας, τεύχεα, carry off as a prize, 23.663, 809, al.; ἀέθλια or ἄεθλον φ. carry off, win a prize, 9.127, 23.413; τὰ πρῶτα φέρεσθαι (sc. ἄεθλα) 23.275, 538; οὐ σμικρὸν ἆθλον τῆς ἐρωτικῆς μανίας φέρονται Pl.Phdr. 256d
; of perquisites, τὸ.. σκέλος τοὶ ἱαρομνάμονες φερόσθω (i. e. φερούσθω from Φερόνσθω) IG42(1).40.13 (Epid., v/iv B. C.): hence οὐ τὰ δεύτερα Hdt.8.104
; πλέον φέρεσθαι get more or a larger share for onself, gain the advantage over any one, τινος Hdt.7.211, cf. S.OT 500 (lyr.), E.Hec. 308; ταῦτα ἐπὶ σμικρόν τι ἐφέροντο τοῦ πολέμου this they received as a small help towards the war, Hdt.4.129; ἠνείκατο παρὰ Ἐγεσταίων τὰ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος 5.47
; ἴδια κέρδεα προσδεκόμενοι παρὰ τοῦ Πέρσεω οἴσεσθαι 6.100
; χάριν φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῶν And.2.9
; φ. τὴν ἀπέχθειαν αὐτῶν Antipho 3.4.2
; ὀνείδη Pl.Lg. 762a
; εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς οἴσῃ S.El. 969
; δάκρυ πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων A.Pr. 638
; ἀπό τινος βοσκάν Id.Eu. 266
(lyr.); ἐξ ἀνανδρίας τοὔνομα Aeschin.1.131
: generally, get for one's own use and profit, take and carry away, esp. to one's own home, τοῦ.. πάμπρωτα παρ' ἀγλαὰ δῶρα φέροιο Il.4.97
: hence φέρειν or φέρεσθαι is often used pleon., v. infr. xi.

VII abs., of roads or ways, lead to a place, ὁδὸν φέρουσαν ἐς ἱρόν Hdt.2.122
, cf. 138; τὴν φέρουσαν ἄνω (sc. ὁδόν) Id.9.69; τῆς μὲν ἐς ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φ., τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς Σάρδις Id.7.31
; ἐπὶ Σοῦσα X.An.3.5.15
; ἁπλῆ οἶμος εἰς Ἅιδου φέρει A.Fr. 239
; ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουσα ὁδός Th.3.24
(but ἡ ἐπ' Ἀθηνῶν φέρουσα ibid.); also ἡ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φ. the door leading to the garden, D.47.53; αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φ. πύλαι, αἱ ἐπὶ τὸ τεῖχος φ. κλίμακες, X.HG7.2.7, cf. PMich.Zen.38.27 (iii B. C.), Plb.10.12.3.

2 of a district or tract of country, stretch, extend to or towards, φέρειν ἐπί or ἐς θάλασσαν Hdt.4.99
; ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν ib. 100; πρὸς νότον Id.7.201
; ἡ ἀπὸ δυσμῶν αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς Κιμβρικῆς) καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄλβιν φέρουσα Ptol.Geog.2.11.2
, cf. 3.

b of time, τῇ νυκτὶ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὴν β τοῦ Παχών PPetr.3p
.x (iii B. C.), cf. PTeb.61 (b) 288 (ii B. C.), BGU1832.5 (i B. C.), etc.

3 metaph., lead to or towards, be conducive to, ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει Hdt.1.10
; τὰ ἐς ἄκεσιν φέροντα Id.4.90
; ἐς βλάβην, ἐς φόβον φέρον, S.OT 517, 991; εἰς ὄκνον E.Supp. 295
: esp. in good sense, tend, conduce to one's interest, ἐπ' ἀμφότερά τοι φέρει (impers.) ταῦτα ποιέειν Hdt.3
. 134; so τὰ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα X.Mem.4.2.31
; τροφαὶ μέγα φ. εἰς ἀρετάν E.IA 562
(lyr.); μέγα τι οἰόμεθα φέρειν (sc. κοινωνίαν γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων) εἰς πολιτείαν Pl.R. 449d
; τὰ καλὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα εἰς ἀρετῆς κτῆσιν φ. ib. 444e, cf. X.Cyr.8.1.42; τοῦτο ἔφερεν αὐτῷ was for his good, M.Ant.5.8.

b point to, refer to a thing, ἐς τί ὑμῖν ταῦτα φαίνεται φέρειν; Hdt.1.120
; φωνὴ φέρουσα πρός τινα addressed to him, Id.1.159; ἐς ἀρηΐους ἀγῶνας φέρον τὸ μαντήϊον Id.9.33
, cf. 6.19; [ὄψις] φέρει ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν refers to.., extends over.., Id.7.19; τὰ ἴχνη τῆς ὑποψίας εἰς τοῦτον φ. point to him, Antipho 2.3.10; πρός τινας Pl.R. 538c
; ταύτῃ <ὁ> νόος ἔφερε Hdt.9.120
; ἡ τοῦ δήμου φέρει γνώμη, ὡς .., the people's opinion inclines to this, that.., Id.4.11; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Th.1.79
: c. inf., τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν whose opinion inclined to giving battle, Hdt.6.110, cf. 5.118; πλέον ἔφερέ οἱ ἡ γνώμη κατεργάσεσθαι his opinion inclined rather to the view.., Hdt.8.100, cf. 3.77.

VIII carry or have in the mouth, i. e. speak of, πολύν τινα ἐν ταῖς διαβολαῖς φέρειν Aeschin.3.223
; use a word, οὐκ οἶδα καθ' ὁποτέρου τούτων οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ τῆς ζειᾶς ἔφερον ὄνομα Gal.Vict.Att.6
, cf. 7.644, 15.753, 876; record an event, οἱ δευτέρῳ μετὰ τὴν ἔξοδον.. ἔτει φέροντες αὐτήν D.H.1.63
: more freq. in [voice] Pass., πονηρῶς, εὖ, φέρεσθαι, to be ill or well spoken of, X.HG1.5.17, 2.1.6; ἀτίμως ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φ. Pl.Ep. 328e
; abs., φέρεται [the report] is carried about, i.e. it is said, c. acc. et inf., τοιόνδε φέρεται πρῆγμα γίνεσθαι Hdt.8.104
(v.l.); ἐν χρόνοις φέρεται μνημονευομένοις is recorded as occurring within historical times, Str.1.3.15; ὅτε καὶ Δημόκριτος φέρεται τελευτήσας Sor.Vit.Hippocr.11
; κρίνομεν.. τὰ γραφέντα ὑφ' ἡμῶν προστάγματα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς νόμοις φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῖν OGI331.60
(Pergam., ii B. C.);
ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα φέρεται
are in use, Ptol.Geog.7.4.11
; of literary works, to be in circulation, ἐπιστόλιον αὐτοῦ τοιοῦτον φέρεται Plu.2.808a
, cf. 209e, 832d, 833c, al., Jul.Or.6.189b, Gp.2.35.8, Eun.VSp.456 B.; πρόλογοι διττοὶ φέρονται Arg.E.Rh.; ὁ στίχος οὗτος ἔν τισιν οὐ φέρεται Sch.E. Ph. 377, cf. Sch.Il.8.557.

2 of words, φέρεσθαι ἐπί τι to refer to something, A.D.Pron.61.5, Synt.21.14, al.

IX imper. φέρε like ἄγε, as Adv., come, now, well,

1 before another imper., φέρε γὰρ σήμαινε A.Pr. 296
(anap.); φέρ' εἰπὲ δή μοι S.Ant. 534
; φ. δή μοι τόδε εἰπέ Pl.Cra. 385b
; so φέρετε.. πειρᾶσθε Hdt.4.127
.

2 before [ per.] 1sg. or pl. of subj. used imperatively, φέρε ἀκούσω, φέρε στήσωμεν, Hdt.1.11,97; φ. δὲ νῦν.. φράσω Id.2.14
; φέρ' ἴδω, τί δ' ἥσθην; Ar.Ach.4
; φέρε δὴ κατίδω Id. Pax 361
, cf. 959; φ. δὴ ἴδωμεν, φ. δὴ σκεψώμεθα, Pl.Grg. 455a, Prt. 330b, cf. E.Or. 1281 (lyr.), Ph. 276, etc.: less freq. before 2 pers., φέρε.. μάθῃς S.Ph. 300
.

3 before a rhetorical question, φέρε.. τροπαῖα πῶς ἀναστήσεις; E.Ph. 571
; φ. δὴ νῦν.. τί γαμεῖθ' ἡμᾶς; Ar.Th. 788
(anap.), cf. Ach. 541, Pl.R. 348c; φ. μῶν οὐκ ἀνάγκη .. ; Id.Lg. 805d; φ. πρὸς θεῶν πῶς .. ; Id.Grg. 514d; freq. in phrase φέρε γάρ, φέρε τίς γὰρ οὗτος; Ar.Nu. 218
; φ. γὰρ πρὸς τίνας χρὴ πολεμεῖν; Isoc.4.183
, cf. Antipho 5.36; also φ. δή Pl.Grg. 455a
, al.: usu. first in a sentence, but τὴν ἀνδρείαν δὲ φ. τί θῶμεν; Id.Lg. 633c
, etc.

4 φέρε δή, ἐάν πῃ διαλλαχθῶμεν .. come let us see if we can.., Id.Cra. 430a.

5 φέρε c. inf., suppose, grant that.. φ. λέγειν τινά Plu.2.98b
; φ. εἰπεῖν let us say, D.Chr.31.93, 163, Porph.Abst.3.3; οἷον φ. εἰ. Iamb. in Nic.p.47
P., al. ( οἷον φέρε alone, Hierocl. in CA11p.439M.).

X part. neut. τὸ φέρον, as Subst., destiny, fate, τὸ φ. ἐκ θεοῦ [καλῶς] φέρειν [χρή] ye must bear nobly what heaven bears to you, awards you, S.OC 1693 (lyr., codd., sed secl. καλῶς, χρή) ; εἰ τὸ φερον σε φέρει, φέρε καὶ φέρου AP 10.73
(Pall.).

2 part. φέρων in all genders freq. joined with another Verb:

a to express a subsidiary action, φέρων ἔδωκε he brought and gave, Od.22.146; δὸς τῷ ξείνῳ ταῦτα φέρων take this and give it him, 17.345; ἔγχος ἔστησε φέρων brought the spear and placed it, 1.127; σῖτον παρέθηκε φέρουσα ib. 139, al., cf. S.Tr. 622; τοῦτο ἐλθὼν οἴκαδε φέρων τῷ πατρὶ ἔδωκα Pl.Hp.Ma. 282e
, cf. R. 345b; so ὁ μὲν Ἐπίχαρμον.. εἰς δέκα τόμους φέρων συνήγαγεν Porph.Plot. 24
; ἑκάστῃ ἐννεάδι τὰ οἰκεῖα φέρων συνεφόρησα ibid., etc.; sts. translatable by with, ᾤχοντο φέροντες τὰ γράμματα Th.7.8
.

b intr., in pass. sense, to denote unrestrained action, νῦν σε μάλ' οἴω.. φέροντα.. φιλητεύσειν h.Merc. 159
; φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε νηΐ φιλίῃ she went and rammed, rammed full tilt, Hdt.8.87; ὅταν ἐπὶ θάτερ' ὥσπερ εἰς τρυτάνην ἀργύριον προσενέγκῃς, οἴχεται φέρον down it sinks, D.5.12;
τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πολέμου παρῆκαν, φέροντες δὲ παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πρὸς αὐτὸν Ἀκράγαντα προσήρεισαν
hurling themselves, Plb.1.17.8
; εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα Aeschin.3.82
; ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις ib.90, cf. 1.175, 3.143,146; in the foll. passages φέρων accompanies a Verb of throwing, giving, entrusting, or dedicating, and expresses wholehearted action, whether wise or unwise; there is always an accus., freq. of the reflex. Pron., governed by the principal Verb (or perh. by φέρων): ἐπεὶ ἐς τοὺς κρατῆρας ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἐνέβαλον (sc. ὁ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ) when I went (or took) and threw myself.., Luc.Icar.13, cf. Fug.1, Plu.Comp.Arist. Cat.1, Fab.6, Per.12, Paus.1.30.1, Ael.VH8.14, Frr.10,69, Philostr. VA3.4; τὴν κατασκευὴν.. φέρων ἐδωρήσατο τῇ μητρί D.S.31.27
, cf. Ach.Tat.1.7; σεαυτὸν.. φέρων ἀπημπόληκας Luc.Merc.Cond.24
; τί παθόντες.. τοῖς ἀτέκνοις τῶν γερόντων ἐσποιεῖτε φέροντες αὑτούς; Luc. DMort.6.3
, cf. Ind.19, Laps.22; ταύτῃ (sc. τῇ ὀργῇ) φέρων ὑπέθηκεν ἑαυτόν Plu.Them.24
, cf. Per.7; τούτῳ φέροντες ὑποβάλλουσι τοὺς υἱούς Id.2.4b
, cf. Luc.6, Pomp.27, Ael.VH6.1, Max.Tyr.1.2; προσέθετο φέρων ἑαυτὸν ἐκείνῳ Eun.VS p.456
B., cf.pp.461,465 B., Dam. ap. Suid. s.v. Σεβηριανός; ἀλλὰ σοὶ μὲν, ὦ θεῶν πάτερ, ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἀναθήσω Jul.Or.7.231b.

3 ἔκκρισις.. ἐκ μικρῶν φέρουσα διαστημάτων occurring at short intervals, Sor.2.45.

XI φέρειν, φέρεσθαι are freq. added epexegetically to δίδωμι and similar Verbs, δῶκεν.. τρίποδα φέρειν Il.23.513
, cf. 16.665, 17.131; τεύχεα.. δότω φέρεσθαι 11.798
, cf. Od.21.349, E.Tr. 419, 454(troch.).

B [voice] Pass. is used in most of the above senses:—special cases:

I to be borne or carried involuntarily, esp. to be borne along by waves or winds, to be swept away, φέρεσθαι ἀνέμοισι, θυέλλῃ, Od.9.82, 10.54, cf. A.Pers. 276 (lyr.), etc.; πᾶν δ' ἦμαρ φερόμην, of Hephaestus falling from Olympus, Il.1.592; ἧκε φέρεσθαι he sent him flying, 21.120; ἧκα πόδας καὶ χεῖρε φέρεσθαι I let go my hands and feet, let them swing free [in the leap], Od.12.442, cf. 19.468; μέγα φέρεται πὰρ σέθεν, of a word uttered, comes with weight, Pi.P.1.87; βίᾳ φέρεται Pl.Phdr. 254a
; πνεῦμα φερόμενον Id.R. 496d
; τὸ πνεῦμα κατὰ τὰς ἀναπνοὰς εἴσω τε καὶ ἔξω φέρεται Gal.16.520
; ῥεῖν καὶ φέρεσθαι Pl.Cra. 411c
; φ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Id.Phd. 114b
; simply, move, go, ποῖ γᾶς φέρομαι; S.OT 1309
(anap.); οὐκ οἶσθ' ὅποι γῆς οὐδ' ὅποι γνώμης φέρῃ Id.El. 922
, cf. E.Hec. 1076 (anap.), etc.; of the excreta, τὰ φερόμενα.. εἰ μὲν αὐτομάτως φέροιτο Philum.
ap. Aët.9.12; πρὸς κοιλίαν φερομένην Aët.4.19
: metaph., εἰς τὸ λοιδορεῖν φέρῃ E.Andr. 729
; πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν Pl.Phdr. 254b
, cf. X.Mem.2.1.4; ἐπὶ ταὐτὸ φέρονται have the same tendency, Phld.Vit.p.42 J.; ἀπὸ δογμάτων καὶ ἀπὸ θεωρημάτων φ. Vett.Val.238.30
; of veins, to be conveyed, Gal.15.531; also ἡ φερομένη οὐσία (the doctrine of) universal motion, Pl.Tht. 177c; οἱ φερόμενοι θεοί the moving gods, i. e. the stars and planets, Plot.2.3.9.

2 freq. in part. with another Verb of motion, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ἐς τοὺς Αἰγινήτας they fell into their hands with a rush, at full speed, Hdt.8.91; ἀπὸ.. ἐλπίδος ᾠχόμην φερόμενος Pl.Phd. 98b
; ἧκε φερόμενος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν Aeschin.3.89
.

3 of voluntary and impulsive motion, ἰθὺς φέρεται μένει Il.20.172
; ὁμόσε τινὶ φέρεσθαι come to blows with him, X.Cyn.10.21; δρόμῳ φ. πρός τινα Id.HG4.8.37
; φυγῇ εἰς ἑαυτοὺς φ. Id.Cyr.1.4.23
; ἥξει ἐπ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος Lycurg.59
; φερόμενος ὑπ' ὀργῆς D.H.Comp.18
.

II metaph., καλῶς, κακῶς φέρεσθαι, of things, schemes, etc., turn out, prosper well or ill, succeed or fail, οὔτ' ἂν.. νόμοι καλῶς φέροιντ' ἄν S.Aj. 1074
; κακῶς φ. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ X.HG3.4.25
; εὖ φέρεται ἡ γεωργία Id.Oec.5.17
; ὀλιγώρως ἔχειν καὶ ἐᾶν ταῦτα φέρεσθαι to neglect things and let them take their course, D.8.67; less freq. of persons, fare well or ill, εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις being generally successful.., Th.5.16, cf. 15; καλῶς φερόμενος τὸ καθ' ἑαυτόν Id.2.60
; φ. ἐν προτιμήσει παρά τινι D.S.33.5
; χεῖρον φερομένη παρὰ τἀδελφῷ J.AJ16.7.6
; of euphonious writing, σύνθεσις καλῶς φερομένη Phld.Po.5.26
.

2 behave, ὑποκριτικῶς, ἀστάτως, etc., Vett.Val.38.20, 197.8, al.

3 have an opinion, ὅπως ἠνέχθη περὶ τοῦ σφυγμοῦ what his opinion was about.., Marcellin.Puls. 233.

C [voice] Med.: for its chief usages, v. supr. A. VI. 3.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φέρω

10 बद्ध _baddha

बद्ध p. p. [बन्ध्-कर्मणि क्त]

1 Bound, tied, fastened.

-2 Chained, fettered.

-3 Captured, caught.

-4 Confined, imprisoned.

-5 Put or girt on.

-6 Restrained, suppressed, withheld.

-7 Formed, built; शरबद्धमिवाभाति द्वितीयं भास्वदम्बरम्Rām.6.17.24.

-8 Cherished, entertained.

-9 Combined, united.

-1 Firmly rooted, firm.

-11 Shut, stopped, closed.

-12 Inlaid, studded.

-13 Composed (as verses).

-14 Formed, contracted; असूत सा नागवधूपभोग्यं मैनाकमम्भोनिधिबद्धसख्यम् Ku.1.2.

-15 Manifested, displayed.

-16 Entangled, involved.

-17 Congealed, clotted (as blood.)

-18 Effected, caused, formed, produced; बद्धं जालकम् Ś.1.29;2.6; U.6.17; Māl.3.7.

-19 Possessed, preserved; बद्धं सन्तं मन्यते लब्धमर्थम् Mb.5.92.23.

-Comp. -अङ्गुलित्र, अङ्गुलि- त्राण a. having as finger-guard fastened.

-अञ्जलि a. folding the hands together in supplication, with the hands joined in humble entreaty or raised to the fore- head as a mark of respect. ˚पुट a. forming a cup with the hollowed hands.

-अनुराग a. having the affection fixed upon, feeling or manifesting love for.

-अनुशय a.

1 feeling repentant.

-2 of a fixed resolve.

-अम्बु n. water derived from a current.

-अवस्थिति a. constant.

- आदर a. attaching great value to.

-आनन्द a. joyful.

-आयुध a. accoutred with arms.

-आशङ्क a. one whose suspicions have been roused, grown suspicious.

-उत्सव a. enjoying or observing a festival or holiday.

-उद्यम a. making united efforts.

-कक्ष, -कक्ष्य a. see बद्धपरिकर.

-कदम्बक a. forming groups; छायाबद्धकदम्बकं मृगकुलं रोमन्थ- मभ्यस्यतु Ś.2.6.

-कलापिन् a. one who has his quiver tied on.

-केसर a.

1 forming hair.

-2 having the filaments formed.

-कोप, -मन्यु, -रोष a.

1 feeling anger, enter- taining a feeling of anger.

-2 suppressing or governing one's wrath.

-गुदम् a kind of obstruction of the bowels; निरुध्यते तस्य गुदे पुरीषं, निरेति कृच्छ्रादपि चाल्पमल्पम् । हृन्नाभिमध्ये परिवृद्धिमेति तस्योदरं बद्धगुदं वदन्ति ॥ Bhāva. P.

-ग्रह a. insisting on something.

-चित्त, -मनस् a. having the mind intently fixed on, rivetting the mind on.

-जिह्व a. tongue-tied.

-तूणीर a. equipped with a quiver.

-दृष्टि, -नेत्र, -लोचन a. having the eyes intently fixed on, looking with a steadfast gaze at; ग्रीवाभङ्गाभिरामं मुहुरनुपतति स्यन्दने बद्धदृष्टिः Ś.1.7.

-धार a. continuously or incessantly flowing.

-निश्चय a. firmly resolved, resolute.

-नेपथ्य a. attired in a theatrical dress.

-परिकर a. having the girdle girded on, one who has girded up his loins; i. e. ready, prepared.

-पुरीष a. having the bowels constipated.

-प्रतिज्ञ a.

1 one who has made a vow or promise.

-2 firmly resolved.

-प्रतिश्रुत् a. reso- nant with echoes.

-भाव a. having the affection or heart fixed upon, enamoured of (with loc.); दृढं त्वयि बद्धभावो- र्बशी V.2.

-भूः f.

1 the lowest floor.

-2 ground prepar- ed for the site of a house.

-3 pavement.

-मण्डल a. ranged in circles.

-मुष्टि a.

1 having a closed fist.

-2 close-fisted, covetous.

-मूत्र a. obstructing the urine.

-मूल a. deep-rooted, striking root firmly; बद्धमूलस्य मूलं हि महद्वैरतरोः स्त्रियः Śi.2.38.

-मौन a. holding the tongue, keeping silence, silent; अदृश्यत त्वच्चरणारविन्दविश्लेषदुःखादिव बद्धमौनम् R.13.23.

-राग a. having the desire fixed on, enamoured, impassioned; गल्लस्थलेषु मदवारिषु बद्धरागमत्त- भ्रमद्भ्रमरपादतलाहतो$पि Pt.1.123.

-वसति a. fixing an- abode.

-वाच् a. tongue-tied, maintaining silence.

-वेपथु a. seized with tremour.

-वैर a. one who has conceived bitter hatred or contracted confirmed hostility.

-शिख a.

1 one whose hair is tied up (into a knot on the crown of the head).

-2 one who is still in childhood, young.

-सूतः a particular preparation of quicksilver.

-स्नेह a. forming an attachment, conceiving affec- tion for.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > बद्ध _baddha

11 entre

prep.

1 between.

entre las diez y las once between ten and eleven o'clock

entre paréntesis in brackets

entre nosotros between you and me, between ourselves (en confianza)

discutían entre sí they were arguing with each other

era un color entre verde y azul the color was somewhere between green and blue

dudo entre ir o quedarme I don't know o can't decide whether to go or to stay

2 among, amongst.

estaba entre los asistentes she was among those present

estuvo entre los mejores he was one of o amongst the best

entre otras cosas among other things

3 divided by.

intj.

come in.

pres.subj.

3^rd person singular (él/ella/ello) Present Subjunctive of Spanish verb: entrar.

* * *

entre

► preposición

1 (dos términos) between

■ entre las cuatro y las cinco between four and five

■ entre tú y yo between the two of us

2 (varios) among, amongst

■ entre los periódicos among the newspapers

3 (sumando) counting

■ entre niños y adultos somos doce there are twelve of us counting children and adults

■ entre todos éramos veinte there were twenty of us all together

4 (en) in

■ entre la lluvia in the rain

5 (entremedio) somewhere between

■ entre azul y verde somewhere between blue and green

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

de entre from among, out of

■ la mejor de entre todas the best out of all of them

entre... y... what with... and...

■ entre el frío y la lluvia... what with the cold and the rain...

entre tanto meanwhile, in the meantime

por entre (entre) among, amongst 2 (a través) through

■ pasó por entre la multitud he made his way through the crowd

* * *

prep.

1) between

2) among

* * *

PREP

1) (=en medio de)

a) [dos elementos] between

entre las montañas y el mar — between the mountains and the sea

vendrá entre las diez y las once — he'll be coming between ten and eleven

nos veíamos entre clase y clase — we saw each other between lessons

entre azul y verde — somewhere between blue and green

un líquido entre dulce y amargo — a liquid which is half-sweet, half-sour

dudo entre comprar este o aquel — I'm not sure whether to buy this one or that one

lo cogió entre sus manos — she took it in her hands

- estar entre la vida y la muerte
paréntesis, semana
b) [más de dos elementos] among, amongst

había un baúl entre las maletas — there was a trunk in among(st) the cases

¿has buscado entre las fotografías? — have you looked among(st) the photographs?

una costumbre muy extendida entre los romanos — a widespread custom among(st) the Romans

puedes hablar, estamos entre amigos — you can speak freely, we're among(st) friends

paso el día entre estas cuatro paredes — I spend the whole day within these four walls

se abrieron paso entre la multitud — they forced their way through the crowd

lo vi entre el público — I saw him in the audience

entre los que conozco es el mejor — it's the best of those that I know

empezó a trabajar como mensajero, entre otras cosas — he started work as a courier, among(st) other things

2) [indicando colaboración, participación]

lo terminamos entre los dos — between the two of us we finished it

le compraremos un regalo entre todos — we'll buy her a present between all of us, we'll all club together to buy her a present

¿entre cuántos habéis hecho el trabajo? — how many of you did it take to do the work?

esto lo solucionaremos entre nosotros — we'll sort that out among(st) o between ourselves

la cuento entre mis mejores amigas — I count her as one of my best friends

entre sí: las mujeres hablaban entre sí — the women were talking among(st) themselves

los tres hermanos están muy unidos entre sí — the three brothers are very close to each other

3) [uso aditivo]

entre viaje y alojamiento nos gastamos 80 euros — we spent 80 euros between the travel and the accommodation, the travel and the accommodation came to 80 euros between them

entre niños y niñas habrá unos veinte en total — there are about twenty in total, if you count boys and girls

entre que era tarde y hacía frío, decidimos no salir — what with it being late and cold, we decided not to go out

entre unas cosas y otras no conseguía dormir — what with one thing and another I couldn't sleep

entre unas cosas y otras se nos hizo de noche — before we knew it, it was night

4) (Mat)

20 entre 4 — 20 divided by 4

20 entre 4 es igual a 5 — 4 into 20 goes 5 (times)

5) esp LAm
*
entre más estudia más aprende — the more he studies the more he learns

6)

entre tanto — ver entretanto

* * *
I
preposición

1)

a) ( indicando posición en medio de) between

se sienta entre Carlos y yo — he sits between Carlos and me

entre estas cuatro paredes — within these four walls

entre paréntesis — in brackets

se me escapó por entre los dedos — it slipped through my fingers

abierto entre semana — open during the week

comer entre horas — to eat between meals

b) ( en relaciones de comunicación o cooperación) between

que quede entre tú y yo — this is just between you and me

entre los tres logramos levantarlo — between the three of us we managed to lift it

¿por qué no le hacemos un regalo entre todos? — why don't we all get together to buy him a present?

c) ( con verbos recíprocos) among

cuando hablan entre ellos — ( dos personas) when they talk to each other; ( más de dos personas) when they talk among themselves

entre ellos se entienden — they understand each other o one another

2)

a) (en el número, la colectividad de) among

entre los trabajadores — among the workers

hay un traidor entre nosotros — there's a traitor among us

entre otras cosas — among other things

b) ( mezclado con) among

entre las monedas que me dio — among the coins he gave me

se perdió entre la muchedumbre — he got lost in the crowd

c) ( sumando una cosa a otra) with

hay unas cien personas entre alumnos y profesores — with o including pupils and teachers there are about a hundred people

entre una cosa y otra... — (fam) what with one thing and another... (colloq)

d) ( en distribuciones) among

repártelos entre los niños — share them out among the children

e) (Mat)

diez entre dos es (igual a) cinco — two into ten goes five (times)

3)

entre tanto — meanwhile, in the meantime
II
adverbio (esp AmL)

entre más... menos/más... — the more... the less/more...

* * *

= amidst, among, amongst, between, inter, across, amid, twixt, betwixt, in between.

Ex. The second edition of AACR was published in 1978, amidst some dispute as to whether it was either necessary or desirable.

Ex. He is probably unique among Associations of Research Libraries directors in that he played a significant role in the creation of ALA's Social Responsibilities Round Table.

Ex. Amongst these are numbered: some specific legal and governmental works, such as laws, decrees, treaties; works that record the collective thought of a body, for example, reports of commissions and committees; and various cartographic materials.

Ex. Citations to 33 Ph.D.theses produced at the University between 1974 and 1978 were analysed.

Ex. On magnetic tape, for instance, there will be a need for an inter record gap so that the tape drive has some space, some leeway, when starting or stopping the fast moving tape.

Ex. Other important elements of libraries, such as the quality of the staff and the nature of the reference collections themselves, vary across libraries.

Ex. The director continued speaking amid the embers of their mirth.

Ex. The article ' Twixt dilemma and desk-top deluxe' reports on the developments from the major computer printer manufacturers.

Ex. Hume says we must distinguish ' betwixt personal identity as it regards our thought or imagination and as it regards our passions or the concern we take in ourselves'.

Ex. The reason for this is that the qualifier, Public Libraries, is randomly distributed depending on whether other facets are cited in between.

----

* a caballo entre = midway between.

* a mitad de camino entre = midway between.

* compromiso entre novios = engagement.

* conector entre facetas = intra-facet connector.

* de entre los nuestros = in our ranks.

* de la zona de entre mareas = intertidal.

* distinguir entre... y... = draw + the line between... and....

* entre bastidores = behind the scenes, backstage, offstage.

* entre corchetes = in brackets.

* entre culturas = intercultural.

* entre diferentes edades = cross-age [cross age].

* entre dos fuegos = crossfire, pig(gy) in the middle.

* entre el dicho y el hecho hay un gran trecho = many a slip between the cup and the lip.

* entre el dicho y el hecho hay un gran trecho = There's many a slip 'twixt cup and lip.

* entre el hombre y el sistema = human-system.

* entre ellos contamos con los siguientes = numbered amongst these are.

* entre éstos se incluyen = amongst these are numbered.

* entre fronteras = transborder.

* entre grupos sociales = intergroup.

* entre instituciones = interagency [inter-agency].

* entre la espada y la pared = between the rock and the hard place, between the devil and the deep blue sea, between a rock and a hard place.

* entre la máquina y el hombre = human-machine.

* entre la población en general = mainstream.

* entre la profesión = intra-professional.

* entre las dos y las cuatro = mid-afternoon.

* entre las páginas de = between the covers of.

* entre los miembros de la familia = intergenerational.

* entre los vivos = land of the living, the.

* entre manos = at hand, in hand.

* entre medias = in between.

* entre + Nombre Singular + y + Nombre Singular = between + Nombre Plural.

* entre nosotros = with us, between you and me, between ourselves.

* entre ordenadores = computer-to-computer.

* entre otras cosas = amongst other things, for one thing, inter alia, among other things.

* entre otros = amongst others, among others.

* entre países = transfrontier, transborder, transnational, cross-country, cross-national [cross national], cross-border.

* entre paréntesis = parenthetically, parenthetic, in brackets, in parenthesis.

* entre profesiones = cross-occupational.

* entre + Pronombre = in + Posesivo + midst.

* entre regiones = cross-regional, inter-regional [interregional].

* entre semana = on weekdays, midweek, weekday.

* entre sí = each other.

* entre tres partes = 3-party [three-party].

* entre tú y yo = between you and me, between ourselves.

* entre varias bibliotecas = cross-library, cross-library.

* entre varias instituciones = inter-institutionally [interinstitutionally].

* entre varias lenguas = cross-lingual.

* entre varios países = multi-country [multicountry].

* entre... y... = anywhere from/between... and...., somewhere between... and....

* espacio entre columnas = intercolumn spacing.

* estar a caballo entre = stand + midway between.

* estar entre = fall between.

* hablar entre dientes sin ser entendido = mumble.

* niños entre cinco y siete años = five-to-sevens.

* que quede entre nosotros = between you and me, between ourselves.

* reconciliación entre = healing of the breach between.

* resolución de la ambigüedad entre términos = term disambiguation.

* * *
I
preposición

1)

a) ( indicando posición en medio de) between

se sienta entre Carlos y yo — he sits between Carlos and me

entre estas cuatro paredes — within these four walls

entre paréntesis — in brackets

se me escapó por entre los dedos — it slipped through my fingers

abierto entre semana — open during the week

comer entre horas — to eat between meals

b) ( en relaciones de comunicación o cooperación) between

que quede entre tú y yo — this is just between you and me

entre los tres logramos levantarlo — between the three of us we managed to lift it

¿por qué no le hacemos un regalo entre todos? — why don't we all get together to buy him a present?

c) ( con verbos recíprocos) among

cuando hablan entre ellos — ( dos personas) when they talk to each other; ( más de dos personas) when they talk among themselves

entre ellos se entienden — they understand each other o one another

2)

a) (en el número, la colectividad de) among

entre los trabajadores — among the workers

hay un traidor entre nosotros — there's a traitor among us

entre otras cosas — among other things

b) ( mezclado con) among

entre las monedas que me dio — among the coins he gave me

se perdió entre la muchedumbre — he got lost in the crowd

c) ( sumando una cosa a otra) with

hay unas cien personas entre alumnos y profesores — with o including pupils and teachers there are about a hundred people

entre una cosa y otra... — (fam) what with one thing and another... (colloq)

d) ( en distribuciones) among

repártelos entre los niños — share them out among the children

e) (Mat)

diez entre dos es (igual a) cinco — two into ten goes five (times)

3)

entre tanto — meanwhile, in the meantime
II
adverbio (esp AmL)

entre más... menos/más... — the more... the less/more...

* * *

= amidst, among, amongst, between, inter, across, amid, twixt, betwixt, in between.

Ex: The second edition of AACR was published in 1978, amidst some dispute as to whether it was either necessary or desirable.

Ex: He is probably unique among Associations of Research Libraries directors in that he played a significant role in the creation of ALA's Social Responsibilities Round Table.

Ex: Amongst these are numbered: some specific legal and governmental works, such as laws, decrees, treaties; works that record the collective thought of a body, for example, reports of commissions and committees; and various cartographic materials.

Ex: Citations to 33 Ph.D.theses produced at the University between 1974 and 1978 were analysed.

Ex: On magnetic tape, for instance, there will be a need for an inter record gap so that the tape drive has some space, some leeway, when starting or stopping the fast moving tape.

Ex: Other important elements of libraries, such as the quality of the staff and the nature of the reference collections themselves, vary across libraries.

Ex: The director continued speaking amid the embers of their mirth.

Ex: The article ' Twixt dilemma and desk-top deluxe' reports on the developments from the major computer printer manufacturers.

Ex: Hume says we must distinguish ' betwixt personal identity as it regards our thought or imagination and as it regards our passions or the concern we take in ourselves'.

Ex: The reason for this is that the qualifier, Public Libraries, is randomly distributed depending on whether other facets are cited in between.

* a caballo entre = midway between.

* a mitad de camino entre = midway between.

* compromiso entre novios = engagement.

* conector entre facetas = intra-facet connector.

* de entre los nuestros = in our ranks.

* de la zona de entre mareas = intertidal.

* distinguir entre... y... = draw + the line between... and....

* entre bastidores = behind the scenes, backstage, offstage.

* entre corchetes = in brackets.

* entre culturas = intercultural.

* entre diferentes edades = cross-age [cross age].

* entre dos fuegos = crossfire, pig(gy) in the middle.

* entre el dicho y el hecho hay un gran trecho = many a slip between the cup and the lip.

* entre el dicho y el hecho hay un gran trecho = There's many a slip 'twixt cup and lip.

* entre el hombre y el sistema = human-system.

* entre ellos contamos con los siguientes = numbered amongst these are.

* entre éstos se incluyen = amongst these are numbered.

* entre fronteras = transborder.

* entre grupos sociales = intergroup.

* entre instituciones = interagency [inter-agency].

* entre la espada y la pared = between the rock and the hard place, between the devil and the deep blue sea, between a rock and a hard place.

* entre la máquina y el hombre = human-machine.

* entre la población en general = mainstream.

* entre la profesión = intra-professional.

* entre las dos y las cuatro = mid-afternoon.

* entre las páginas de = between the covers of.

* entre los miembros de la familia = intergenerational.

* entre los vivos = land of the living, the.

* entre manos = at hand, in hand.

* entre medias = in between.

* entre + Nombre Singular + y + Nombre Singular = between + Nombre Plural.

* entre nosotros = with us, between you and me, between ourselves.

* entre ordenadores = computer-to-computer.

* entre otras cosas = amongst other things, for one thing, inter alia, among other things.

* entre otros = amongst others, among others.

* entre países = transfrontier, transborder, transnational, cross-country, cross-national [cross national], cross-border.

* entre paréntesis = parenthetically, parenthetic, in brackets, in parenthesis.

* entre profesiones = cross-occupational.

* entre + Pronombre = in + Posesivo + midst.

* entre regiones = cross-regional, inter-regional [interregional].

* entre semana = on weekdays, midweek, weekday.

* entre sí = each other.

* entre tres partes = 3-party [three-party].

* entre tú y yo = between you and me, between ourselves.

* entre varias bibliotecas = cross-library, cross-library.

* entre varias instituciones = inter-institutionally [interinstitutionally].

* entre varias lenguas = cross-lingual.

* entre varios países = multi-country [multicountry].

* entre... y... = anywhere from/between... and...., somewhere between... and....

* espacio entre columnas = intercolumn spacing.

* estar a caballo entre = stand + midway between.

* estar entre = fall between.

* hablar entre dientes sin ser entendido = mumble.

* niños entre cinco y siete años = five-to-sevens.

* que quede entre nosotros = between you and me, between ourselves.

* reconciliación entre = healing of the breach between.

* resolución de la ambigüedad entre términos = term disambiguation.

* * *

entre¹

prep

A

1 (indicando posición en medio de) between

se sienta entre Carlos y yo he sits between Carlos and me

entre estas cuatro paredes within these four walls

creó una barrera entre ellos it created a barrier between them

lo escribió entre paréntesis she wrote it in brackets

se me escapó por entre los dedos it slipped through my fingers

correteaban por entre los arbustos they ran in and out of the bushes

no pruebo bocado entre horas I don't eat a thing between meals

entre estas dos fechas between these two dates

está abierto entre semana it is open during the week

entre las cuatro y las cinco between four and five (o'clock)

con una expresión entre complacida y sorprendida with an expression somewhere between pleasure and surprise, with a half pleased, half surprised look

es de un color entre el azul y el violeta it's a bluey purple color o a purplish blue color

vacilaba entre decírselo y callar she was torn between telling him and keeping quiet

estoy entre el verde y el azul I can't decide between the green one and the blue one

2 (en relaciones de comunicación) between

entre nosotros or entre tú y yo, no tiene la más mínima idea between you and me o just between ourselves, he doesn't have a clue

las relaciones entre los cuatro hermanos relations between the four brothers

3 (en relaciones de cooperación) between

entre los dos/cuatro logramos levantarlo between the two of us/four of us we managed to lift it

¿por qué no le hacemos un regalo entre todos? why don't we all get together to buy him a present?

4 (con verbos recíprocos) among

entre ellos se entienden they understand each other o one another

cuando hablan entre ellos no entiendo nada when they talk among themselves, I can't understand a thing

tres depósitos unidos entre sí por una serie de tubos three tanks linked (to each other) by a series of pipes

B

1 (en el número, la colectividad de) among, amongst ( BrE)

entre los trabajadores among the workers

bendita tú eres entre todas las mujeres blessed art thou among women

está entre los mejores/más grandes del mundo it is among the best/largest in the world, it is one of the best/largest in the world

entre los temas debatidos, éste fue el más conflictivo of the topics discussed this proved to be the most controversial

hay un traidor entre nosotros there's a traitor among us o ( liter) in our midst

estamos entre amigos we're all friends here, you're among friends

es mentiroso, entre otras cosas he's a liar, among other things

2 (mezclado con) among

entre las monedas que me dio había algunas extranjeras there were some foreign coins among the ones he gave me

se perdió entre la muchedumbre he got lost in the crowd

lo encontré entre la arena I found it in the sand

3 (sumando una cosa a otra) with

hay unas cien personas entre alumnos, padres y profesores with o including pupils, parents and teachers there are about a hundred people

entre una cosa y otra nos llevó toda una mañana ( fam); what with one thing and another it took us a whole morning ( colloq)

4 (en distribuciones) among

repártelos entre los niños share them out among the children

5 [ Vocabulary notes (Spanish) ] ( Mat):

tienes que dividirlo entre cinco you have to divide it by five

diez entre dos es (igual a) cinco two into ten goes five (times), ten divided by two is five

C

entre tanto meanwhile, in the meantime

entre tanto, vayan poniendo la mesa meanwhile o in the meantime, you can lay the table

entre tanto (que) lo hacen while they do it

entre²

adverb

( esp AmL): entre más/menos... the more/less...

entre más pide, menos le dan the more he asks for, the less they give him

entre menos estudies, menos aprenderás the less you study, the less you will learn

* * *

Del verbo entrar: ( conjugate entrar)

entré es:

1ª persona singular (yo) pretérito indicativo

entre es:

1ª persona singular (yo) presente subjuntivo

3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente subjuntivo

3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) imperativo

Multiple Entries:
algo entre
entrar
entre
entrar ( conjugate entrar) verbo intransitivo
1 ( acercándose) to come in;
( alejándose) to go in;
◊ déjame entre let me in;

hazla entre tell her to come in, show her in;
entró corriendo he ran in, he came running in;
¿se puede entre con el coche? can you drive in?;
había gente entrando y saliendo there were people coming and going;
¿cómo entró? how did he get in?;
entre en or (esp AmL) a algo ‹a edificio/habitación› to go into sth;
entró en el or al banco she went into the bank
2 (en etapa, estado) entre en algo ‹en periodo/guerra/negociaciones› to enter sth;
◊ entre en calor to get warm;

entró en coma he went into a coma
3
a) (introducirse, meterse):

◊ cierra la puerta, que entra frío close the door, you're letting the cold in;

me entró arena en los zapatos I've got sand in my shoes
b) ( poderse meter):

◊ ¿entrará por la puerta? will it get through the door?;

(+ me/te/le etc):
◊ estos vaqueros no me entran I can't get into these jeans;

el zapato no le entra he can't get his shoe on;
no me entra la segunda (Auto) I can't get it into second (gear)
4 [ hambre] (+ me/te/le etc):
◊ le entró hambre she felt o got hungry;

me ha entrado la duda I'm beginning to have my doubts;
me entró sueño I got o began to feel sleepy
5 ( empezar) to start, begin;
◊ entró de aprendiz he started o began as an apprentice

6 ( incorporarse) entre en or (esp AmL) a algo ‹en empresa/ejército/club› to join sth;
‹ en convento› to enter sth;
el año que entré en or a la universidad the year I started college I've just joined the association
7 ( estar incluido):
◊ el postre no entra en el precio dessert is not included in the price;

¿cuántas entran en un kilo? how many do you get in a kilo?
verbo transitivo ( traer) to bring in;
( llevar) to take in;
◊ ¿cómo van a entre el sofá? how are they going to get the sofa in?

entre preposición
1
a) (dos personas, cosas) between;

◊ lo decidieron entre ellos dos they decided it between the two of them;

está entre las dos casas it's between the two houses;
entre paréntesis in brackets;
cuando hablan entre los dos when they talk to each other
b) (más de dos personas, cosas) among;

◊ los alumnos hablaban entre ellos the pupils were talking among themselves;

entre otras cosas among other things;
se perdió entre la muchedumbre he disappeared into the crowd;
entre estas cuatro paredes within these walls
c) (indicando cooperación, distribución):

◊ entre los tres logramos levantarlo we managed to lift it between the three of us;

le hicimos con regalo entre todos we all got together and brought him a present;
repártelos entre los niños/entre todos share them out among the children/between everybody
2 ( en expresiones de tiempo):
◊ abierto entre semana open during the week;

llegaré entre las tres y las cuatro I'll be arriving between three and four;
cualquier semana entre julio y agosto any week in July or August
3
◊ entre tanto meanwhile, in the meantime

■ adverbio (esp AmL):
◊ entre más come más/menos engorda the more he eats the more/less he puts on weight

entrar
I verbo intransitivo
1 to come in, go in, enter: los ladrones entraron por la ventana, the burglars entered through the window ➣ Ver nota en ir
2 (encajar) to fit: esta llave no entra, this key doesn't fit
3 (estar incluido) to be included: eso no entra en el precio, that's not included in the price
4 (en una organización, partido) to join, get into: entró en el club, he was admitted to the club
5 (en una situación) to go into: el avión entró en barrena, the plane went into a spin
entrar en calor, to warm up
6 (comenzar) el mes que entra, next month, the coming month
7 (sobrevenir) to come over: le entraron ganas de llorar, he felt like crying
me entró un ataque de histeria, I went into hysterics
8 (agradar) no me entran las lentejas, I don't like lentils
II verbo transitivo
1 to bring in: entra las sillas, take the chairs in
2 Inform to enter
♦ Locuciones: entrar en la cabeza: no me entra en la cabeza que hayas hecho eso, I can't understand why you have done that
ni entrar ni salir, to play no part in the matter: en cuestiones sentimentales ni entro ni salgo, I steer well clear of touchy subjects
entre preposición
1 (señalando límites) between: ponlo entre tú y ella, put it between you and her
entre azul y verde, between blue and green
(con la colaboración de) lo haremos entre Pedro, Pablo y yo, Peter, Paul and myself will do it between us
2 (rodeado de) among(st)
estoy entre amigos, I'm among friends
(incluido en) está entre los primeros de la clase, he's among the best students of his class
En general, entre se traduce por between cuando se refiere a dos cosas y among o amongst (más antiguo) cuando se refiere a más de dos. Sin embargo, se puede emplear between, junto con un verbo de movimiento, cuando queremos indicar que un conjunto de cosas se dividió en dos grupos: El río fluye entre los árboles. The river flows between the trees.

' entre' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
abismal
- abismo
- abordaje
- aclarar
- adherencia
- analogía
- apareamiento
- barrera
- bastante
- bastidor
- bien
- caballero
- caballo
- cada
- camaradería
- camino
- ceja
- cerrarse
- clara
- claro
- comillas
- compenetración
- competencia
- conexión
- confianza
- confundirse
- congruencia
- considerada
- considerado
- contarse
- corporativismo
- correlación
- cruce
- desnivel
- despertarse
- dicotomía
- diente
- disidencia
- distanciamiento
- dividir
- dividirse
- dudar
- economía
- entendimiento
- escaramuza
- escoger
- espada
- estragos
- estrechar
- estrechamiento
English:
ability
- alike
- already
- amid
- among
- amongst
- angular
- antagonism
- antipathy
- backstage
- barrel
- barrier
- behind
- between
- blue-collar
- bond
- bonding
- border
- bracket
- cement
- chip in
- choose
- chuckle
- circulate
- civilian
- clash
- close
- club
- connect
- connected
- dart
- derby
- devil
- differentiate
- discriminate
- distinction
- distinguish
- divide
- dole out
- enter
- entrails
- equal
- equality
- evenly
- exit poll
- export
- fall out
- fatalism
- feature
- fence

* * *

entre

♦ prep

1. [en medio de dos] between;

está entre mi casa y la suya it's between my house and hers, it's on the way from my house to hers;

entre las diez y las once between ten and eleven o'clock;

entre 1939 y 1945 between 1939 and 1945, from 1939 to 1945;

entre paréntesis in brackets, in parentheses;

no abre entre semana it doesn't open during the week;

no hay punto de comparación entre la ciudad y el campo there's no comparison between the city and the countryside;

la diferencia entre tú y yo es que… the difference between you and me is that…;

era un color entre verde y azul the colour was somewhere between green and blue;

su estado de ánimo estaba entre la alegría y la emoción his state of mind was somewhere between o was a mixture of joy and excitement;

se encuentra entre la vida y la muerte she is fighting for her life;

entre nosotros [en confianza] between you and me, between ourselves;

que quede esto entre tú y yo this is between you and me;

dudo entre ir o quedarme I don't know o can't decide whether to go or to stay;

entre una(s) cosa(s) y otra(s)… what with one thing and another…;

no tuve tiempo de llamarte entre unas cosas y otras between one thing and another I didn't have time to phone you

2. [en medio de muchos] among, amongst;

estaba entre los asistentes she was among those present;

entre los celtas se solía… the Celts used to…;

entre los médicos se considera que… most doctors believe that…;

lo hicieron entre tres amigos the three friends did it between them;

entre todos estoy seguro de que lo conseguiremos I'm sure we'll manage to do it between us;

es el favorito entre los expertos the experts have him as the favourite;

estuvo entre los mejores he was one of o amongst the best;

no temas, estás entre amigos don't be afraid, you're amongst friends;

desapareció entre la multitud she disappeared into the crowd;

apareció de entre el humo it emerged from the smoke;

entre hombres y mujeres somos más de cien there are over a hundred of us, men and women together;

me regaló, entre otras cosas, una botella de whisky she gave me several things, including a bottle of whisky;

tu principal defecto, entre otros, es que… your main defect, amongst others, is that…;

lo encontré entre mis papeles I found it amongst my papers;

entre sí amongst themselves;

discutían entre sí they were arguing with each other

3. [en divisiones]
divide veinte entre cuatro divide twenty by four;

ocho entre dos cuatro eight divided by two is four

♦ entre que loc conj
Fam [mientras]
entre que se levanta y se arregla, se le va media mañana it takes her half the morning just to get up and get ready

♦ entre tanto loc adv
[mientras tanto] meanwhile;
haz las camas, entre tanto, yo lavo los platos you make the beds, in the meantime, I'll do the washing up

♦ entre más loc adv
Andes, CAm, Méx [cuanto más] the more;
entre más duerme, más cansado se siente the more she sleeps, the more tired she feels

* * *

entre

prp

1 dos cosas, personas between;

entre las dos y las tres between two and three

2 más de dos among(st), between;

entre nosotros among o between us;

repartir algo entre tres split sth three ways

3 expresando cooperación between;

lo pagamos entre todos we paid for it among o between us;

lo hicieron entre tres they did it between the three of them;

la relación entre ellos the relationship between them;

te cuento entre mis amigos I regard you as a friend

4 MAT

:

ocho entre cuatro son dos eight divided by four is two, four into eight is two

* * *

entre prep

1) : between

2) : among

* * *

entre prep

1. (dos cosas) between

se sentó entre sus dos hermanos he sat between his two brothers

entre las dos y las cinco between two and five o'clock

2. (más de dos cosas) among

lo encontré entre mis libros I found it among my books

entre todos together

Spanish-English dictionary > entre

12 entrelazar

v.

1 to interlace, to interlink.

2 to intertwine, to mat, to enlace, to interlock.

* * *

entrelazar

Conjugation model [ REALIZAR], like realizar

► verbo transitivo

1 to entwine, interweave, interlace

\

FRASEOLOGÍA

entrelazar las manos to join one's hands, hold hands

* * *

verb

to intertwine, interweave

* * *
1.
verbo transitivo <cintas/hilos> to interweave, intertwine

con las manos entrelazadas — hand in hand
2.
entrelazarse v pron to intertwine, interweave

* * *

= lock together, criss-cross [crisscross], intertwine, entwine, interlock, mesh, braid, knot together, interweave, twine, interlace.

Ex. As the water was draining away between the wires of the sieve, he gave the mould a sideways shake locking the fibres together and 'shutting' the sheet.

Ex. The university buildings are grouped about stretches of greensward crisscrossed by paths and canopied by impressive trees.

Ex. Traditional and emerging markets for library school graduates are likely to intertwine rather than exist as parallel trends in the future.

Ex. The Zimbabwe Library Association history is entwined with library development in Zimbabwe (Rhodesia).

Ex. Panopoulos put her arms on the desk, interlocked her fingers, and forward, her eyes glinting with rage behind her thick spectacles.

Ex. Meshing together the many means of communication remains the central task of libraries and this task continues to require financial support = La tarea central de las bibliotecas sigue siendo la de combinar los númerosos medios de comunicación, algo que continúa necesitando apoyo económico.

Ex. This is a painting of a girl in a red dress with her hair braided, seated behind a parapet near a window.

Ex. Every project in this book is made by knotting together some type of cordage.

Ex. Information services should also be interwoven with the social fabric and firmly rooted in a commuity in order to be acceptable.

Ex. This liana has an old stem twining around a tree branch in the tropical deciduous forest of Michoacan, Mexico.

Ex. In structure, baskets were closely related to textiles: both were made by interlacing strands of threads by hand.

----

* entrelazarse = become + intertwined.

* * *
1.
verbo transitivo <cintas/hilos> to interweave, intertwine

con las manos entrelazadas — hand in hand
2.
entrelazarse v pron to intertwine, interweave

* * *

= lock together, criss-cross [crisscross], intertwine, entwine, interlock, mesh, braid, knot together, interweave, twine, interlace.

Ex: As the water was draining away between the wires of the sieve, he gave the mould a sideways shake locking the fibres together and 'shutting' the sheet.

Ex: The university buildings are grouped about stretches of greensward crisscrossed by paths and canopied by impressive trees.

Ex: Traditional and emerging markets for library school graduates are likely to intertwine rather than exist as parallel trends in the future.

Ex: The Zimbabwe Library Association history is entwined with library development in Zimbabwe (Rhodesia).

Ex: Panopoulos put her arms on the desk, interlocked her fingers, and forward, her eyes glinting with rage behind her thick spectacles.

Ex: Meshing together the many means of communication remains the central task of libraries and this task continues to require financial support = La tarea central de las bibliotecas sigue siendo la de combinar los númerosos medios de comunicación, algo que continúa necesitando apoyo económico.

Ex: This is a painting of a girl in a red dress with her hair braided, seated behind a parapet near a window.

Ex: Every project in this book is made by knotting together some type of cordage.

Ex: Information services should also be interwoven with the social fabric and firmly rooted in a commuity in order to be acceptable.

Ex: This liana has an old stem twining around a tree branch in the tropical deciduous forest of Michoacan, Mexico.

Ex: In structure, baskets were closely related to textiles: both were made by interlacing strands of threads by hand.

* entrelazarse = become + intertwined.

* * *

entrelazar [A4 ]

vt

‹cintas/hilos› to interweave, intertwine

caminaban con las manos entrelazadas they walked along hand in hand

■ entrelazarse

v pron

to intertwine, interweave

* * *

entrelazar ( conjugate entrelazar) verbo transitivo ‹cintas/hilos› to interweave, intertwine;
◊ con las manos entrelazadas hand in hand

entrelazarse verbo pronominal
to intertwine, interweave
entrelazar verbo transitivo, entrelazarse verbo reflexivo to entwine

' entrelazar' also found in these entries:
Spanish:
entrelazarse
- trabar
- entretejer
English:
entwine
- interlock
- intertwine

* * *

entrelazar

♦ vt
[dedos] to interlace; [líneas, trazos] to intertwine; [hilos, cintas] to interweave; [historias, destinos, vidas] to intertwine, to weave together;
entrelazaron sus manos they joined hands

♦ See also the pronominal verb entrelazarse

* * *

entrelazar

v/t interweave, intertwine

* * *

entrelazar {21} vt

entrecruzar: to interweave, to intertwine

Spanish-English dictionary > entrelazar

13 nouer

nouer [nwe]

➭ TABLE 1

1. transitive verb

   a. ( = faire un nœud avec) to tie

• avoir la gorge nouée to have a lump in one's throat

• j'ai l'estomac noué my stomach is in knots

   b. ( = entourer d'une ficelle) to tie up

   c. [+ relations] to strike up ; [+ amitié] to form

2. reflexive verb

► se nouer [amitié] to be formed

• sa gorge se noua a lump came to his throat

* * *
nwe
1.

verbe transitif

1) ( attacher) to tie [lacets, cravate]; to tie up [chaussure, colis]

nouer ses cheveux — to tie one's hair back

nouer ses bras autour du cou — to put one's arms around somebody's neck

2) ( contracter)

avoir la gorge nouée — to have a lump in one's throat

avoir l'estomac noué — to have a knot in one's stomach

3) ( établir) to establish [relations]; to engage in [dialogue]

4) Cinéma, Littérature, Théâtre to weave [intrigue]

2.

se nouer verbe pronominal

1) Cinéma, Littérature, Théâtre [intrigue] to take shape

2) [relations diplomatiques] to be established; [dialogue, amitié] to begin

* * *
nwe vt
1) [corde, fil] to tie, to knot

2) fig, [alliance] to form

nouer la conversation — to start a conversation

* * *

nouer verb table: aimer

A vtr

1 ( faire un nœud à) to tie [lacets, ceinture en tissu, cravate]; to tie up, to tie [sth] up [chaussure, colis]; nouer deux ficelles (ensemble) to tie ou knot two pieces of string (together);

2 ( attacher) nouer qch autour de qch to tie sth round GB ou around US sth; nouer ses cheveux to tie one's hair back, to tie back one's hair;

3 ( avec les bras) nouer ses bras autour du cou/de la taille de qn to put one's arms around sb's neck/waist;

4 ( contracter) l'émotion me nouait la gorge I felt choked with emotion; avoir la gorge nouée to have a lump in one's throat; avoir l'estomac noué to have a knot in one's stomach;

5 ( établir) to establish [relations] (avec with); to engage in [dialogue] (avec with);

6 Cin, Littérat, Théât to weave [action dramatique, intrigue, machination].

B se nouer vpr

1 Cin, Littérat, Théât [intrigue] to take shape;

2 [relations diplomatiques] to be established; [dialogue] to begin;

3 ( se contracter) ma gorge se nouait I had a lump in my throat; mon estomac se nouait my stomach knotted; tous les muscles de mon corps se nouaient all the muscles in my body were knotted.

[nwe] verbe transitif

1. [attacher ensemble - lacets, cordes] to tie ou to knot (together)

elle noua ses bras autour de mon cou she wrapped her arms round my neck

2. [faire un nœud à] to tie (up), to knot

laisse-moi nouer ta cravate let me knot your tie

j'ai noué le bouquet avec de la ficelle I tied the bouquet together with string

il a noué le foulard autour de sa taille he tied the scarf around his waist

elle noua ses cheveux avec un ruban she tied her hair back ou up with a ribbon

la peur lui nouait la gorge/les entrailles (figuré) his throat/stomach tightened with fear

3. [établir]

nouer des relations avec quelqu'un to enter into a relationship with somebody

nouer une intrigue to hatch a plot

4. TEXTILES to splice ou to knot (together)

————————

[nwe] verbe intransitif

BOTANIQUE to set

————————

se nouer verbe pronominal (emploi passif)

[ceinture] to fasten, to do up

————————

se nouer verbe pronominal intransitif

1. [s'entrelacer] to intertwine

ses mains se nouèrent comme pour prier his hands joined ou came together as if to pray

2. [s'instaurer] to develop, to build up

c'est à cet âge que beaucoup d'amitiés se nouent it's at that age that a lot of friendships are made

l'action ne se noue que dans le dernier chapitre only in the last chapter does the plot come to a head ou climax

Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > nouer

14 संहत

saṉ-hata
mfn. struck together, closely joined orﾠ united with (instr.), keeping together, contiguous, coherent, combined, compacted, forming one mass orﾠ body ĀṡvṠr. Mn. MBh. etc.;

accompanied orﾠ attended by (instr.) Mn. VII, 165 ;
become solid, compact, firm, hard MBh. Kāv. etc.;
strong-limbed, athletic MBh. ;
strong, intensive VarBṛS. ;
(prob.) complex, composite, compound (said of a partic. tone andﾠ odour) MBh. ;
struck, hurt, wounded, killed W. ;
n. a partic. position in dancing, Saṃigīt.;
- kulīna mfn. belonging to a family closely allied orﾠ related ĀpṠr. Sch. ;
- jānu orﾠ - jānuka mfn. knock-kneed L. ;
- tala m. the two hands joined with the open palms brought together W. ;
- tā f. close contact orﾠ union Ṡiṡ. ;
- tva n. id. Pañcat. (v.l.);
complexity. compactness, close combination W. ;
- pucchi ind. with contracted tail gaṇa dvidaṇḍy-ādi;
- bhrū mfn. knitting the brows MBh. ;
- bhrūkuṭi-mukha mfn. one on whose face the brows are contracted ib. ;
- mūrti mfn. of compact form orﾠ shape, strong, intensive VarBṛS. ;
vāk-kala mfn. (du.) « joining the tones of the voice», singing a duet MārkP. ;
- vṛittôru mfn. one who has round andﾠ firm thighs R. ;
- starnī f. a woman whose breasts are very close to each other MW. ;
- hasta mfn. seizing orﾠ holding each other by the hand (- tva, n.) Gobh. Sch. ;
-tâ̱ṅga mfn. strong-limbed, well-knit Suṡr. ;
in close contiguity (as hills) MBh. ;
-tâ̱ñjoli mfn.;
joining the hollowed han ds (as a mark of supplication) Hariv. ;
-tâ̱ṡva m. N. of a king (son of Nikumbha) Hariv. ;
- tôru mfn. firm-thighed MBh.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > संहत

15 in

1.
in (old forms endŏ and indŭ, freq. in ante-class. poets; cf. Enn. ap. Gell. 12, 4; id. ap. Macr. S. 6, 2; Lucil. ap. Lact. 5, 9, 20; Lucr. 2, 1096; 5, 102; 6, 890 et saep.), prep. with abl. and acc. [kindr. with Sanscr. an; Greek en, en-tha, en-then, eis, i. e. en-s, ana; Goth. ana; Germ. in], denotes either rest or motion within or into a place or thing; opp. to ex; in, within, on, upon, among, at; into, to, towards.
I.
With abl.
A.
In space.
1.
Lit., in (with abl. of the place or thing in which):
aliorum fructus in terra est, aliorum et extra,
Plin. 19, 4, 22, § 61:
alii in corde, alii in cerebro dixerunt animi esse sedem et locum,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 19:
eo in rostris sedente suasit Serviliam legem Crassus,
id. Brut. 43, 161:
qui sunt cives in eadem re publica,
id. Rep. 1, 32 fin.:
facillimam in ea re publica esse concordiam, in qua idem conducat omnibus,
id. ib.:
T. Labienus ex loco superiore, quae res in nostris castris gererentur, conspicatus,
Caes. B. G. 2, 26, 4:
quod si in scaena, id est in contione verum valet, etc.,
Cic. Lael. 26, 97:
in foro palam Syracusis,
id. Verr. 2, 2, 33, § 81:
plures in eo loco sine vulnere quam in proelio aut fuga intereunt,
Caes. B. C. 2, 35:
tulit de caede, quae in Appia via facta esset,
Cic. Mil. 6, 15:
in via fornicata,
Liv. 22, 36:
vigebat in illa domo mos patrius et disciplina,
Cic. de Sen. 11, 37:
in domo furtum factum ab eo qui domi fuit,
Quint. 5, 10, 16:
nupta in domo,
Liv. 6, 34, 9:
copias in castris continent,
in, within, Caes. B. C. 1, 66:
cum in angusto quodam pulpito stans diceret,
Quint. 11, 3, 130:
se ac suos in vehiculo conspici,
Liv. 5, 40, 10:
malo in illa tua sedecula sedere, quam in istorum sella curuli,
Cic. Att. 4, 10:
sedere in solio,
id. Fin. 2, 21, 66:
Albae constiterant, in urbe opportuna,
id. Phil. 4, 2, 6. —
Sometimes, also, with names of places: omnes se ultro sectari in Epheso memorat mulieres,
Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 182:
heri aliquot adolescentuli coiimus in Piraeo,
Ter. Eun. 3, 4, 1:
navis et in Cajeta est parata nobis et Brundisii,
Cic. Att. 8, 3, 6:
complures (naves) in Hispali faciendas curavit,
Caes. B. C. 2, 18:
caesos in Marathone ac Salamine,
Quint. 12, 10, 24:
in Berenice urbe Troglodytarum,
Plin. 2, 73, 75, § 183.—
2.
In indicating a multitude or number, of, in, or among which a person or thing is, in, among (= gen. part.):
in his poeta hic nomen profitetur suum,
Ter. Eun. prol. 3:
Thales, qui sapientissimus in septem fuit,
Cic. Leg. 2, 11, 26:
peto ut eum complectare, diligas, in tuis habeas,
id. Fam. 13, 78, 2; cf.:
in perditis et desperatis,
id. ib. 13, 56, 1:
omnia quae secundum naturam fiunt, sunt habenda in bonis,
id. de Sen. 19, 71:
dolor in maximis malis ducitur,
id. Leg. 1, 11, 31:
justissimus unus in Teucris,
Verg. A. 2, 426:
cecidere in pugna ad duo milia... in his quatuor Romani centuriones,
Liv. 27, 12, 16:
in diis et feminae sunt,
Lact. 1, 16, 17.—
3.
Of analogous relations of place or position:
sedere in equo,
on horseback, id. Verr. 2, 5, 10:
quid legati in equis,
id. Pis. 25, 60:
sedere in leone,
Plin. 35, 10, 36, § 109:
in eo flumine pons erat,
on, over, Caes. B. G. 2, 5:
in herboso Apidano,
on the banks of, Prop. 1, 3, 6:
in digitis,
on tiptoe, Val. Fl. 4, 267:
castra in limite locat,
on the rampart, Tac. A. 1, 50:
ipse coronam habebat unam in capite, alteram in collo,
on, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 11, § 27:
oleae in arbore,
Cels. 2, 24:
Caesaris in barbaris erat nomen obscurius,
among, Caes. B. C. 1, 61:
in ceteris nationibus, Cels. praef. 1: qui in Brutiis praeerat,
Liv. 25, 16, 7:
in juvenibus,
Quint. 11, 1, 32:
nutus in mutis pro sermone est,
id. 11, 3, 66.—Of dress, like cum, q. v.:
in veste candida,
Liv. 45, 20, 5; 34, 7, 3:
in calceis,
id. 24, 38, 2:
in insignibus,
id. 5, 41, 2:
in tunicis albis,
Plin. Ep. 7, 27, 13:
in Persico et vulgari habitu,
Curt. 3, 3, 4:
in lugubri veste,
id. 10, 5, 17:
in Tyriis,
Ov. A. A. 2, 297:
in Cois,
id. ib. v. 298; cf.:
homines in catenis Romam mittere,
Liv. 29, 21, 12; 32, 1, 8: quis multa te in rosa urget, etc., Hor C. 1, 5, 1; so, in viola aut in rosa, Cic. Tusc. [p. 912] 5, 26, 73.—So of arms:
duas legiones in armis,
Caes. B. G. 7, 11, 6; cf. Verg. A. 3, 395:
in armis hostis,
under arms, Ov. M. 12,65:
quae in ore atque in oculis provinciae gesta sunt (= coram),
Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 33, § 81; so,
in oculis provinciae,
id. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 2:
in oculis omnium,
id. ib. 1, 3, 7:
divitiae, decus, gloria in oculis sita sunt,
Sall. C. 20, 14; Curt. 4, 13, 1; Liv. 22, 12, 6:
Julianus in ore ejus (Vitellii) jugulatur,
Tac. H. 3, 77; Sen. Ben. 7, 19, 7.—Of a passage in any writing (but when the author is named, by meton., for his works, apud is used, Krebs, Antibarb. p. 561):
in populorum institutis aut legibus,
Cic. Leg. 1, 15, 42:
in illis libris qui sunt de natura deorum,
id. Fat. 1, 1:
in Timaeo dicit,
id. N. D. 1, 12, 30:
epistula, in qua omnia perscripta erant,
Nep. Pelop. 3, 2:
perscribit in litteris, hostes ab se discessisse,
Caes. B. G. 5, 49; but in is also used with an author's name when, not a place in his book, but a feature of his style, etc., is referred to:
in Thucydide orbem modo orationis desidero,
Cic. Or. 71, 234:
in Herodoto omnia leniter fluunt,
Quint. 9, 4, 18.—Of books:
libri oratorii diu in manibus fuerunt,
Cic. Att. 4, 13, 2; id. Lael. 25, 96; but more freq. trop.: in manibus habere, tenere, etc., to be engaged, occupied with, to have under control or within reach:
philosophi quamcunque rem habent in manibus,
id. Tusc. 5, 7, 18:
quam spem nunc habeat in manibus, exponam,
id. Verr. 1, 6, 16:
rem habere in manibus,
id. Att. 6, 3, 1; cf.:
neque mihi in manu fuit Jugurtha qualis foret,
in my power, Sall. J. 14, 4:
postquam nihil esse in manu sua respondebatur,
Liv. 32, 24, 2:
quod ipsorum in manu sit,... bellum an pacem malint,
Tac. A. 2, 46; but, cum tantum belli in manibus esset, was in hand, busied (cf.:
inter manus),
Liv. 4, 57, 1; so,
quorum epistulas in manu teneo,
Cic. Phil. 12, 4, 9; cf. id. Att. 2, 2, 2:
in manu poculum tenens,
id. Tusc. 1, 29, 71:
coronati et lauream in manu tenentes,
Liv. 40, 37, 3; Suet. Claud. 15 fin. —Of that which is thought of as existing in the mind, memory, character, etc.:
in animo esse,
Cic. Fam. 14, 11:
in animo habere,
id. Rosc. Am. 18, 52:
lex est ratio insita in natura,
id. Leg. 1, 6, 18:
in memoria sedere,
id. de Or. 2, 28, 122; cf.:
tacito mutos volvunt in pectore questus,
Luc. 1, 247:
quanta auctoritas fuit in C. Metello!
Cic. de Sen. 17, 61. —So freq. of a person's qualities of mind or character:
erat in eo summa eloquentia, summa fides,
Cic. Mur. 28, 58; cf.:
in omni animante est summum aliquid atque optimum, ut in equis,
id. Fin. 4, 41, 37:
si quid artis in medicis est,
Curt. 3, 5, 13; cf.:
nibil esse in morte timendum,
Lucr. 3, 866.— Esp., in eo loco, in that state or condition:
in eo enim loco res sunt nostrae, ut, etc.,
Liv. 7, 35, 7: si vos in eo loco essetis, quid aliud fecissetis? Cat. ap. Quint. 9, 2, 21; so,
quo in loco, etc.: cum ex equitum et calonum fuga, quo in loco res essent, cognovissent,
Caes. B. G. 2, 26:
videtis, quo in loco res haec siet, Ter Phorm. 2, 4, 6: quod ipse, si in eodem loco esset, facturus fuerit,
Liv. 37, 14, 5.—Hence, without loco, in eo esse ut, etc., to be in such a condition, etc.:
non in eo esse Carthaginiensium res, ut Galliam armis obtineant,
Liv. 30, 19, 3:
cum res non in eo esset, ut Cyprum tentaret,
id. 33, 41, 9; 8, 27, 3; 2, 17, 5; Nep. Mil. 7, 3; id. Paus. 5, 1 (cf. I. C. 1. infra).—
B.
In time, indicating its duration, in, during, in the course of:
feci ego istaec itidem in adulescentia,
in my youth, when I was young, Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 6:
in tempore hoc,
Ter. And. 4, 5, 24:
in hoc tempore,
Tac. A. 13, 47:
in tali tempore,
Sall. C. 48, 5; Liv. 22, 35; 24, 28 al.:
in diebus paucis,
Ter. And. 1, 1, 77:
in brevi spatio,
id. Heaut. 5, 2, 2; Suet. Vesp. 4:
in qua aetate,
Cic. Brut. 43 fin.:
in ea aetate,
Liv. 1, 57:
in omni aetate,
Cic. de Sen. 3, 9:
in aetate, qua jam Alexander orbem terrarum subegisset,
Suet. Caes. 7:
qua (sc. Iphigenia) nihil erat in eo quidem anno natum pulchrius,
in the course of, during the year, Cic. Off. 3, 25, 95 (al. eo quidem anno):
nihil in vita se simile fecisse,
id. Verr. 2, 3, 91: nihil in vita vidit calamitatis A. Cluentius. id. Clu. 6, 18:
in tota vita inconstans,
id. Tusc. 4, 13, 29.—
b.
In tempore, at the right or proper time, in time (Cic. uses only tempore; v. tempus): eccum ipsum video in tempore huc se recipere, Ter. Phorm. 2, 4, 24:
ni pedites equitesque in tempore subvenissent,
Liv. 33, 5:
spreta in tempore gloria interdum cumulatior redit,
id. 2, 47:
rebellaturi,
Tac. A. 12, 50:
atque adeo in ipso tempore eccum ipsum obviam,
Ter. And. 3, 2, 52: in tempore, opportune. Nos sine praepositione dicimus tempore et tempori, Don. ad Ter. And. 4, 4, 19.—
c.
In praesentia and in praesenti, at present, now, at this moment, under these circumstances:
sic enim mihi in praesentia occurrit,
Cic. Tusc. 1, 8, 14:
vestrae quidem cenae non solum in praesentia, sed etiam postero die jucundae sunt,
id. ib. 5, 35, 100:
id quod unum maxime in praesentia desiderabatur,
Liv. 21, 37:
haec ad te in praesenti scripsi, ut, etc.,
for the present, Cic. Fam. 2, 10, 4.—
d.
With gerunds and fut. pass. participles, to indicate duration of time, in:
fit, ut distrahatur in deliberando animus,
Cic. Off. 1, 3, 9; id. Fam. 2, 6, 2:
vitiosum esse in dividendo partem in genere numerare,
id. Fin. 2, 9, 26:
quod in litteris dandis praeter consuetudinem proxima nocte vigilarat,
id. Cat. 3, 3, 6:
ne in quaerendis suis pugnandi tempus dimitteret,
Caes. B. G. 2, 21:
in agris vastandis incendiisque faciendis hostibus,
in laying waste, id. ib. 5, 19:
in excidenda Numantia,
Cic. Off. 1, 22, 76:
cum in immolanda Iphigenia tristis Calchas esset,
id. Or. 21, 74.—
C.
In other relations, where a person or thing is thought of as in a certain condition, situation, or relation, in:
qui magno in aere alieno majores etiam possessiones habent,
Cic. Cat. 2, 8, 18:
se in insperatis repentinisque pecuniis jactare,
id. Cat. 2, 9, 20:
Larinum in summo timore omnium cum armatis advolavit,
id. Clu. 8, 25.—
So freq., of qualities or states of mind: summa in sollicitudine ac timore Parthici belli,
Caes. B. C. 3, 31:
torpescentne dextrae in amentia illa?
Liv. 23, 9, 7:
hunc diem perpetuum in laetitia degere,
Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 5; Cic. Cat. 4, 1, 2:
in metu,
Tac. A. 14, 43:
in voluptate,
Cic. Fin. 1, 19, 62:
alicui in amore esse,
beloved, id. Verr. 2, 4, 1, § 3:
alicui in amoribus esse,
id. Att. 6, 1, 12:
res in invidia erat,
Sall. J. 25, 5; Liv. 29, 37, 17: sum in expectatione omnium rerum, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 4, 10:
num... Diogenem Stoicum coegit in suis studiis obmutescere senectus?
in his studies, Cic. de Sen. 7, 21:
mirificam cepi voluptatem ex tua diligentia: quod in summis tuis occupationibus mihi tamen rei publicae statum per te notum esse voluisti,
even in, notwithstanding your great occupations, id. Fam. 3, 11, 4.—
So freq., of business, employment, occupations, etc.: in aliqua re versari,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 47, § 105:
similia iis, quae in consilio dixerat,
Curt. 5, 5, 23:
in certamine armorum atque in omni palaestra quid satis recte cavetur,
Quint. 9, 4, 8:
agi in judiciis,
id. 11, 1, 78:
tum vos mihi essetis in consilio,
Cic. Rep. 3, 18, 28:
in actione... dicere,
Quint. 8, 2, 2.—Of an office, magistracy:
in quo tum magistratu forte Brutus erat,
Liv. 1, 59, 7; 4, 17, 1:
in eo magistratu pari diligentia se praebuit,
Nep. Han. 7, 5 (cf. B. 1. supra):
in ea ipsa causa fuit eloquentissimus,
Cic. Brut, 43, 160:
qui non defendit nec obsistit, si potest, injuriae, tam est in vitio, quam, etc.,
is in the wrong, acts wrongly, id. Off. 1, 7, 23:
etsi hoc quidem est in vitio, dissolutionem naturae tam valde perhorrescere,
is wrong, id. Fin. 5, 11, 31:
non sunt in eo genere tantae commoditates corporis,
id. ib. 4, 12, 29; cf.:
an omnino nulla sit in eo genere distinctio,
id. Or. 61, 205:
Drusus erat de praevaricatione absolutus in summa quatuor sententiis,
on the whole, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 16; cf.:
et in omni summa, ut mones, valde me ad otium pacemque converto,
id. ib. 3, 5, 5;
but, in summa, sic maxime judex credit, etc.,
in a word, in fine, Quint. 9, 2, 72; Auct. B. Alex. 71; Just. 37, 1, 8:
horum (juvenum) inductio in parte simulacrum decurrentis exercitus erat: ex parte elegantioris exercitii quam militaris artis,
in part, Liv. 44, 9, 5; cf.:
quod mihi in parte verum videtur,
Quint. 2, 8, 6:
patronorum in parte expeditior, in parte difficilior interrogatio est,
id. 5, 7, 22:
hoc facere in eo homine consueverunt,
in the case of, Caes. B. G. 7, 21:
in furibus aerarii,
Sall. C. 52, 12:
Achilles talis in hoste fuit,
Verg. A. 2, 540:
in hoc homine saepe a me quaeris, etc.,
in the case of, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 3, § 6: in nominibus impiis, Sall. C. 51, 15:
suspectus et in morte matris fuit,
Suet. Vit. 14:
qui praesentes metuunt, in absentia hostes erunt, = absentes,
Curt. 6, 3, 8 (cf. I. B. c. supra).—Of the meaning of words, etc.:
non solum in eodem sensu, sed etiam in diverso, eadem verba contra,
Quint. 9, 3, 36:
aliter voces aut eaedem in diversa significatione ponuntur,
id. 9, 3, 69:
Sallustius in significatione ista non superesse sed superare dicit,
Gell. 1, 22, 15:
stips non dicitur in significatione trunci,
Charis. 1, 18, 39:
semper in significatione ea hortus,
Plin. 19, 4, 19, § 50. —
2.
In with abl. of adjj. is used with the verbs esse and habere to express quality:
cum exitus haud in facili essent, i. e. haud faciles,
Liv. 3, 8, 9:
adeo moderatio tuendae libertatis in difficili est,
id. 3, 8, 11; 3, 65, 11; but mostly with adjj. of the first and second declension:
in obscuro esse, Liv. praef. § 3: in dubio esse,
id. 2, 3, 1; 3, 19, 8; Ov. H. 19, 174:
dum in dubiost animus,
Ter. And. 1, 5, 31; 2, 2, 10:
in integro esse,
Cic. Fam. 15, 16, 3; id. Att. 11, 15, 4:
in incerto esse,
Liv. 5, 28, 5:
in obvio esse,
id. 37, 23, 1:
in tuto esse,
id. 38, 4, 10; cf.:
videre te in tuto,
Cat. 30, 6:
in aequo esse,
Liv. 39, 37, 14; Tac. A. 2, 44:
in expedito esse,
Curt. 4, 2, 22:
in proximo esse,
Quint. 1, 3, 4:
in aperto esse,
Sall. C. 5, 3:
in promisco esse,
Liv. 7, 17, 7:
in augusto esse,
Cels. 5, 27, 2:
in incerto haberi,
Sall. J. 46, 8; Tac. A. 15, 17:
in levi habitum,
id. H. 2, 21; cf.:
in incerto relinquere,
Liv. 5, 28, 5; Tac. H. 2, 83.
II.
With acc.
A.
In space, with verbs of motion, into or to a place or thing (rarely with names of towns and small islands;
v. Zumpt, Gram. § 398): influxit non tenuis quidam e Graecia rivulus in hanc urbem,
Cic. Rep. 2, 19:
in Ephesum advenit,
Plaut. Mil. 2, 1, 35:
in Epirum venire,
Cic. Att. 13, 25, 3:
ibo in Piraeeum, visamque, ecquae advenerit in portum ex Epheso navis mercatoria,
Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 2: venio ad Piraeea, in quo magis reprehendendus sum, quod... Piraeea scripserim, non Piraeeum, quam in quod addiderim;
non enim hoc ut oppido praeposui, sed ut loco,
Cic. Att. 7, 3, 10:
se contulisse Tarquinios, in urbem Etruriae florentissimam,
id. Rep. 2, 19:
remigrare in domum veterem e nova,
id. Ac. 1, 4, 13:
cum in sua rura venerunt,
id. Tusc. 5, 35, 102:
a te ipso missi in ultimas gentes,
id. Fam. 15, 9:
in Ubios legatos mittere,
Caes. B. G. 4, 11:
dein Thalam pervenit, in oppidum magnum et opulentum,
Sall. J. 75, 1:
Regillum antiquam in patriam se contulerat,
Liv. 3, 58, 1:
abire in exercitum,
Plaut. Am. prol. 102.— With nuntio:
cum id Zmyrnam in contionem nuntiatum est,
Tac. A. 4, 56:
nuntiatur in castra,
Lact. Most. Pers. 46; cf.:
allatis in castra nuntiis,
Tac. H. 4, 32: in manus sumere, tradere, etc., into one's hands:
iste unumquodque vas in manus sumere,
Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 27, § 63:
Falerios se in manus Romanis tradidisse,
Liv. 5, 27, 3.—Rarely with the verbs ponere, collocare, etc. (pregn., i. e. to bring into... and place there):
in crimen populo ponere,
Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 10:
ut liberos, uxores suaque omnia in silvas deponerent,
Caes. B. G. 4, 19:
duplam pecuniam in thesauros reponi,
Liv. 29, 19, 7:
prius me collocavi in arborem,
Plaut. Aul. 4, 8, 6:
sororem et propinquas suas nuptum in alias civitates collocasse,
Caes. B. G. 1, 18.— Motion in any direction, up to, to, into, down to:
in caelum ascendere,
Cic. Lael. 23 fin.:
filium ipse paene in umeros suos extulisset,
id. de Or. 1, 53, 228:
tamquam in aram confugitis ad deum,
up to the altar, id. Tusc. 3, 10, 25:
Saturno tenebrosa in Tartara misso,
Ov. M. 1, 113:
in flumen deicere,
Cic. Rosc. Am. 25, 70; Nep. Chab. 4, 3.—
2.
Denoting mere direction towards a place or thing, and hence sometimes joined with versus, towards:
quid nunc supina sursum in caelum conspicis,
Plaut. Cist. 2, 3, 78:
si in latus aut dextrum aut sinistrum, ut ipsi in usu est, cubat,
Cels. 2, 3:
Belgae spectant in septentriones et orientem solem,
Caes. B. G. 1, 1:
in orientem Germaniae, in occidentem Hispaniae obtenditur, Gallis in meridiem etiam inspicitur,
Tac. Agr. 10:
in laevum prona nixus sedet Inachus urna,
Stat. Th. 2, 218.—With versus:
castra ex Biturigibus movet in Arvernos versus,
towards, Caes. B. G. 7, 8 fin.:
in Galliam versus movere,
Sall. C. 56, 4: in [p. 913] ltaliam versus, Front. Strat. 1, 4, 11:
si in urbem versus venturi erant,
Plin. Ep. 10, 82. —
3.
So of that which is thought of as entering into the mind, memory, etc. (cf. I. A. 2. fin.):
in memoriam reducere,
Cic. Inv 1, 52, 98:
in animum inducere,
Liv. 27, 9:
in mentem venire,
Cic. Fam. 7, 3:
frequens imitatio transit in mores,
Quint. 1, 11, 3. —
Or into a writing or speech: in illam Metellinam orationem addidi quaedam,
Cic. Att. 1, 13, 5.—
B.
In time, into, till, for:
dormiet in lucem,
into the daylight, till broad day, Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 34:
statim e somno, quem plerumque in diem extrahunt, lavantur,
Tac. G. 22: sermonem in multam noctem produximus, deep into the night, Cic. Rep. Fragm. ap. Arus. Mess. p. 239 Lindem.:
in multam noctem luxit,
Suet. Tib. 74:
si febris in noctem augetur,
Cels. 7, 27:
dixit in noctem atque etiam nocte illatis lucernis,
Plin. Ep. 4, 9, 14:
indutias in triginta annos impetraverunt,
for thirty years, Liv. 9, 37, 12; 7, 20, 8:
nisi id verbum in omne tempus perdidissem,
forever, Cic. Fam. 5, 15, 1:
ad cenam hominem in hortos invitavit in posterum diem,
for the following day, id. Off. 3, 14, 58:
audistis auctionem constitutam in mensem Januarium,
id. Agr. 1, 2, 4:
subito reliquit annum suum seque in annum proximum transtulit,
id. Mil. 9, 24:
solis defectiones itemque lunae praedicuntur in multos annos,
for many years, id. Div. 2, 6, 17:
postero die Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie,
Liv. 27, 2:
qui ab matutino tempore duraverunt in occasum,
Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99:
seritur (semen lini) a Kalendis Octobribus in ortum aquilae,
Col. 2, 10, 17.—With usque:
neque illi didicerunt haec usque in senectutem,
Quint. 12, 11, 20:
in illum usque diem servati,
id. 8, 3, 68:
in serum usque patente cubiculo,
Suet. Oth. 11:
regnum trahat usque in tempora fati,
Sil. 11, 392: in posterum (posteritatem) or in futurum, in future, for the future: in praesens, for the present: in perpetuum or in aeternum, forever:
sancit in posterum, ne quis, etc.,
Cic. Cat. 4, 5, 10:
res dilata est in posterum,
id. Fam. 10, 12, 3:
video quanta tempestas invidiae nobis, si minus in praesens, at in posteritatem impendeat,
id. Cat. 1, 9, 22:
id aegre et in praesentia hi passi et in futurum etiam metum ceperunt,
Liv. 34, 27, 10; cf.:
ingenti omnium et in praesens laetitia et in futurum spe,
id. 30, 17, 1:
effugis in futurum,
Tac. H. 1, 71:
quod eum tibi quaestoris in loco constitueras, idcirco tibi amicum in perpetuum fore putasti?
Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 30; cf.:
oppidum omni periculo in perpetuum liberavit,
id. Fam. 13, 4, 2:
quae (leges) non in tempus aliquod, sed perpetuae utilitatis causa in aeternum latae sunt,
Liv. 34, 6, 4: in tempus, for a while, for a short time, for the occasion (postAug.):
sensit miles in tempus conficta,
Tac. A. 1, 37:
ne urbs sine imperio esset, in tempus deligebatur, qui jus redderet,
id. ib. 6, 11:
scaena in tempus structa,
id. ib. 14, 20. —So in diem, for the day, to meet the day's want:
nihil ex raptis in diem commeatibus superabat,
Liv. 22, 40, 8:
rapto in diem frumento,
id. 4, 10, 1;
but, cum illa fundum emisset in diem,
i. e. a fixed day of payment, Nep. Att. 9, 5: in singulos dies, or simply in dies, with comparatives and verbs denoting increase, from day to day, daily:
vitium in dies crescit,
Vell. 2, 5, 2:
in dies singulos breviores litteras ad te mitto,
Cic. Att. 5, 7:
qui senescat in dies,
Liv. 22, 39, 15: in diem, daily:
nos in diem vivimus,
Cic. Tusc. 5, 11, 33:
in diem et horam,
Hor. S. 2, 6, 47;
and in horas,
hourly, id. C. 2, 13, 14; id. S. 2, 7, 10.—
C.
In other relations, in which an aiming at, an inclining or striving towards a thing, is conceivable, on, about, respecting; towards, against; for, as; in, to; into:
id, quod apud Platonem est in philosophos dictum,
about the philosophers, Cic. Off. 1, 9, 28:
Callimachi epigramma in Ambraciotam Cleombrotum est,
id. Tusc. 1, 34, 84; cf.:
cum cenaret Simonides apud Scopam cecinissetque id car men, quod in eum scripsisset, etc.,
id. de Or. 2, 86, 352:
quo amore tandem inflammati esse debemus in ejus modi patriam,
towards, id. ib. 1, 44, 196:
in liberos nostros indulgentia,
id. ib. 2, 40, 168:
de suis meritis in rem publicam aggressus est dicere,
id. Or. 38, 133: ita ad impietatem in deos, in homines adjunxit injuriam, against, id. N. D. 3, 34 fin.:
in dominum quaeri,
to be examined as a witness against, id. Mil. 22, 60:
in eos impetum facere,
id. Att. 2, 22, 1:
invehi in Thebanos,
Nep. Epam. 6, 1; id. Tim. 5, 3:
quaecumque est hominis definitio, una in omnes valet,
id. Leg. 1, 10, 29:
num etiam in deos immortales inauspicatam legem valuisse?
Liv. 7, 6, 11:
vereor coram in os te laudare amplius,
to your face, Ter. Ad. 2, 4, 5:
si in me exerciturus (pugnos), quaeso, in parietem ut primum domes,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 168:
in puppim rediere rates,
Luc. 3, 545 Burm. (cf.:
sic equi dicuntur in frena redire, pulsi in terga recedere, Sulp. ad loc.): Cumis eam vidi: venerat enim in funus: cui funeri ego quoque operam dedi,
to the funeral, to take charge of the funeral, Cic. Att. 15, 1, B:
se quisque eum optabat, quem fortuna in id certamen legeret,
Liv. 21, 42, 2:
quodsi in nullius mercedem negotia eant, pauciora fore,
Tac. A. 11, 6:
haec civitas mulieri redimiculum praebeat, haec in collum, haec in crines,
Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 33:
Rhegium quondam in praesidium missa legio,
Liv. 28, 28; so,
datae in praesidium cohortes,
Tac. H. 4, 35: hoc idem significat Graecus ille in eam sententiam versus, to this effect or purport, Cic. Div. 2, 10, 25; cf. id. Fam. 9, 15, 4:
haec et in eam sententiam cum multa dixisset,
id. Att. 2, 22:
qui omnia sic exaequaverunt, ut in utramque partem ita paria redderent, uti nulla selectione uterentur,
id. Fin. 3, 4, 12:
in utramque partem disputat,
on both sides, for and against, id. Off. 3, 23, 89: te rogo, me tibi in omnes partes defendendum putes, Vatin. ap. Cic. Fam. 5, 10 fin.:
facillime et in optimam partem cognoscuntur adulescentes, qui se ad claros et sapientes viros contulerunt,
id. Off. 2, 13, 46:
cives Romani servilem in modum cruciati et necati,
in the manner of slaves, Cic. Verr. 1, 5, 13; cf.:
miserandum in modum milites populi Romani capti, necati sunt,
id. Prov. Cons. 3, 5:
senior quidam Veiens vaticinantis in modum cecinit,
Liv. 5, 15, 4;
also: domus et villae in urbium modum aedificatae,
Sall. C. 12, 3:
perinde ac si in hanc formulam omnia judicia legitima sint,
Cic. Rosc. Com. 5, 15:
judicium quin acciperet in ea ipsa verba quae Naevius edebat, non recusasse,
id. Quint. 20, 63; cf.:
senatusconsultum in haec verba factum,
Liv. 30, 43, 9:
pax data Philippo in has leges est,
id. 33, 30:
Gallia omnis divisa est in partes tres,
Caes. B. G. 1, 1; cf.:
quae quidem in confirmationem et reprehensionem dividuntur,
Cic. Part. Or. 9, 33: describebat censores binos in singulas civitates, i. e. for or over each state, id. Verr. 2, 2, 53; cf. id. ib. 2, 4, 26:
itaque Titurium Tolosae quaternos denarios in singulas vini amphoras portorii nomine exegisse,
id. Font. 5, 9:
extulit eum plebs sextantibus collatis in capita,
a head, for each person, Liv. 2, 33 fin.:
Macedonibus treceni nummi in capita statutum est pretium,
id. 32, 17, 2; cf.:
Thracia in Rhoemetalcen filium... inque liberos Cotyis dividitur (i. e. inter),
Tac. A. 2, 67.—
2.
Of the object or end in view, regarded also as the motive of action or effect:
non te in me illiberalem, sed me in se neglegentem putabit,
Cic. Fam. 13, 1, 16:
neglegentior in patrem,
Just. 32, 3, 1:
in quem omnes intenderat curas,
Curt. 3, 1, 21:
quos ardere in proelia vidi,
Verg. A. 2, 347:
in bellum ardentes,
Manil. 4, 220:
nutante in fugam exercitu,
Flor. 3, 10, 4:
in hanc tam opimam mercedem agite ( = ut eam vobis paretis, Weissenb. ad loc.),
Liv. 21, 43, 7:
certa praemia, in quorum spem pugnarent,
id. 21, 45, 4:
in id sors dejecta,
id. 21, 42, 2:
in id fide accepta,
id. 28, 17, 9:
in spem pacis solutis animis,
id. 6, 11, 5 et saep.:
ingrata misero vita ducenda est in hoc, ut, etc.,
Hor. Epod. 17, 63:
nec in hoc adhibetur, ut, etc.,
Sen. Ep. 16, 3:
alius non in hoc, ut offenderet, facit, id. de Ira, 2, 26, 3: in quod tum missi?
Just. 38, 3, 4.—So, like ad, with words expressing affections or inclination of the mind:
in obsequium plus aequo pronus,
Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 10:
paratus in res novas,
Tac. H. 4, 32:
in utrumque paratus,
Verg. A. 2, 61.—
3.
Of the result of an act or effort:
denique in familiae luctum atque in privignorum funus nupsit,
Cic. Clu. 66, 188:
paratusque miles, ut ordo agminis in aciem adsisteret,
Tac. A. 2, 16: excisum Euboicae latus ingens rupis in antrum, Verg. A. 6, 42:
portus ab Euroo fluctu curvatus in arcum,
id. ib. 3, 533:
populum in obsequia principum formavit,
Just. 3, 2, 9:
omnium partium decus in mercedem conruptum erat,
Sall. H. 1, 13 Dietsch:
commutari ex veris in falsa,
Cic. Fat. 9, 17; 9, 18:
in sollicitudinem versa fiducia est,
Curt. 3, 8, 20.—
4.
Esp. in the phrase: in gratiam or in honorem, alicujus, in kindness, to show favor, out of good feeling, to show honor, etc., to any one (first in Liv.; cf. Weissenb. ad Liv. 28, 21, 4;
Krebs, Antibarb. p. 562): in gratiam levium sociorum injuriam facere,
Liv. 39, 26, 12:
pugnaturi in gratiam ducis,
id. 28, 21, 4:
quorum in gratiam Saguntum deleverat Hannibal,
id. 28, 39, 13; cf. id. 35, 2, 6; 26, 6, 16:
oratio habita in sexus honorem,
Quint. 1, 1, 6:
convivium in honorem victoriae,
id. 11, 2, 12:
in honorem Quadratillae,
Plin. Ep. 7, 24, 7:
in honorem tuum,
Sen. Ep. 20, 7; 79, 2; 92, 1; Vell. 2, 41 al.—
5.
In the phrase, in rem esse, to be useful, to avail (cf.: e re esse;
opp.: contra rem esse): ut aequom est, quod in rem esse utrique arbitremur,
Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 10:
si in rem est Bacchidis,
Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 27; 2, 2, 7:
hortatur, imperat, quae in rem sunt,
Liv. 26, 44, 7:
cetera, quae cognosse in rem erat,
id. 22, 3, 2; 44, 19, 3:
in rem fore credens universos adpellare,
Sall. C. 20, 1; cf.:
in duas res magnas id usui fore,
Liv. 37, 15, 7:
in hos usus,
Verg. A. 4, 647.—
6.
To form adverbial expressions:
non nominatim, qui Capuae, sed in universum qui usquam coissent, etc.,
in general, Liv. 9, 26, 8; cf.:
terra etsi aliquanto specie differt, in universum tamen aut silvis horrida aut paludibus foeda,
Tac. G. 5:
in universum aestimanti, etc.,
id. ib. 6:
aestate in totum, si fieri potest, abstinendum est (Venere),
wholly, entirely, Cels. 1, 3 fin.; cf. Col. 2, 1, 2:
in plenum dici potest, etc.,
fully, Plin. 16, 40, 79, § 217:
Marii virtutem in majus celebrare,
beyond due bounds, Sall. J. 73, 5:
aliter se corpus habere atque consuevit, neque in pejus tantum, sed etiam in melius,
for the worse, for the better, Cels. 2, 2:
in deterius,
Tac. A. 14, 43:
in mollius,
id. ib. 14, 39:
quid enim est iracundia in supervacuum tumultuante frigidius? Sen. de Ira, 2, 11: civitas saepta muris neque in barbarum corrupta (v. barbarus),
Tac. A. 6, 42; cf.:
aucto in barbarum cognomento,
id. H. 5, 2:
priusquam id sors cerneret, in incertum, ne quid gratia momenti faceret, in utramque provinciam decerni,
while the matter was uncertain, Liv. 43, 12, 2:
nec puer Iliaca quisquam de gente Latinos In tantum spe tollet avos,
so much, Verg. A. 6, 876:
in tantum suam felicitatem virtutemque enituisse,
Liv. 22, 27, 4; cf.:
quaedam (aquae) fervent in tantum, ut non possint esse usui,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 24:
viri in tantum boni, in quantum humana simplicitas intellegi potest,
Vell. 2, 43, 4:
quippe pedum digitos, in quantum quaeque secuta est, Traxit,
Ov. M. 11, 71:
meliore in omnia ingenio animoque quam fortuna usus,
in all respects, Vell. 2, 13:
ut simul in omnia paremur,
Quint. 11, 3, 25:
in antecessum dare,
beforehand, Sen. Ep. 118.—
7.
Sometimes with esse, habere, etc., in is followed by the acc. (constr. pregn.), to indicate a direction, aim, purpose, etc. (but v. Madvig. Gram. § 230, obs. 2, note, who regards these accusatives as originating in errors of pronunciation); so, esse in potestatem alicujus, to come into and remain in one ' s power: esse in mentem alicui, to come into and be in one ' s mind: esse in conspectum, to appear to and be in sight: esse in usum, to come into use, be used, etc.:
quod, qui illam partem urbis tenerent, in eorum potestatem portum futurum intellegebant,
Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 38:
ut portus in potestatem Locrensium esset,
Liv. 24, 1, 13; 2, 14, 4:
eam optimam rem publicam esse duco, quae sit in potestatem optimorum,
Cic. Leg. 3, 17:
neque enim sunt motus in nostram potestatem,
Quint. 6, 2, 29:
numero mihi in mentem fuit,
Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 25; cf.:
ecquid in mentem est tibi?
id. Bacch. 1, 2, 53:
nec prius surrexisse ac militibus in conspectum fuisse, quam, etc.,
Suet. Aug. 16:
quod satis in usum fuit, sublato, ceterum omne incensum est,
Liv. 22, 20, 6: ab hospitibus clientibusque suis, ab exteris nationibus, quae in amicitiam populi Romani dicionemque essent, injurias propulsare, Cic. Div. ap. Caecil. 20, 66: adesse in senatum [p. 914] jussit a. d. XIII. Kal. Octobr., id. Phil. 5, 7, 19.—Less freq. with habere: facito in memoriam habeas tuam majorem filiam mihi te despondisse, call or bring to mind, Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 108:
M. Minucium magistrum equitum, ne quid rei bellicae gereret, prope in custodiam habitum,
put in prison, kept in prison, Liv. 22, 25, 6:
reliquos in custodiam habitos,
Tac. H. 1, 87.—So rarely with other verbs:
pollicetur se provinciam Galliam retenturum in senatus populique Romani potestatem,
Cic. Phil. 3, 4, 8. —
III.
In composition, n regularly becomes assimilated to a foll. l, m, or r, and is changed before the labials into m: illabor, immitto, irrumpo, imbibo, impello.—As to its meaning, according as it is connected with a verb of rest or motion, it conveys the idea of existence in a place or thing, or of motion, direction, or inclination into or to a place or thing: inesse; inhibere, inferre, impellere, etc. See Hand, Turs. III. pp. 243- 356.
2.
in (before b and p, im; before l, m, and r, the n assimilates itself to these consonants), an inseparable particle [kindred with Sanscr. a-, an-; Gr. a-, an; Goth. and Germ. un-], which negatives the meaning of the noun or participle with which it is connected; Engl. un-, in-, not: impar, unequal: intolerabilis, unbearable, intolerable: immitis, not mild, rude, etc.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > in

16 बद्धाञ्जलि

baddhâ̱ñjali
mfn. one who has joined the hollowed palms of the hands (cf. añjali) Mṛicch. ;

- puṭa mfn. forming a cup with the hollowed hands R.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > बद्धाञ्जलि

17 δεξιόομαι

δεξιόομαι, [tense] impf.

A ἐδεξιούμην X.Cyr.7.3.38
, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl. δεξιόωντο h.Hom.6.16
, A.R.2.756: [tense] fut. - ώσομαι A.Ag. 852
, S.El. 976: [tense] aor. ἐδεξιωσάμην Lys.2.37
, X.Cyr.7.5.53, etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor. ἐδεξιώθην Pl.R. 468b
: ([etym.] δεξιά, δεξιός):—greet with the right hand, welcome, c. acc.pers., Ar.Pl. 753, Lys.2.37, X.Cyr.7.5.53; canvass, τὸν δῆμον Plu.Cat.Mi. 49
: but also c. dat. pers., δεξιοῦσθαι θεοῖς to raise one's right hand to the gods, pay greeting or honour to them, A.Ag. 852: also c. dat. modi, δ. χερσί h.Hom. l. c.; ἐπαίνοις S.El. 976
; δώροις Arist.Mu. 391b8
; λόγοις χρηστοῖς καὶ ἔργοις Paus.2.16.2
; στόματι Luc.Alex. 41
; ὀφθαλμοῖς Lib.Decl.4.18
: c. acc. rei, πυκνὴν ἄμυστιν δεξιούμενοι pledging one in many a bumper, E.Rh. 419:—[voice] Pass., Pl.l.c.;
ζῷα δεξιούμενα
with right hands joined, IG2.754.33
.

II δεξιώσασθαι· ἐγγίσασθαι γυναικί, Hsch.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δεξιόομαι

18 संयत

sáṉ-yata
mfn. held together, held in, held fast etc.;

self-contained, self-controlled with regard to (loc. instr., orﾠ comp.) Gaut. MBh. etc.;
tied together, bound up, fettered, confined, imprisoned, captive Mn. MBh. etc.;
shut up, closed (opp. to vy-ātta) AV. ;
kept in order ( seeﾠ comp.);
suppressed, subdued MBh. ;
= udyata, prepared, ready to (inf.) Hariv. ;
m. « one who controls himself»
N. of Ṡiva MBh. ;
- cetas mfn. controlled in mind MW. ;
-prâ̱ṇa mfn. having the breath suppressed orﾠ having the organs restrained ib. ;
- mānasa mfn. (= - cetas) ib. ;
- mukha mf (ī)n. (= - vāc) Mṛicch. ;
- maithuna mfn. one who abstains from sexual intercourse MBh. ;
- vat mfn. self-controlled, self-possessed Hariv. ;
- vastra mfn. having the dress orﾠ clothes fastened orﾠ tied together Bhartṛ. ;
- vāc mfn. restrained in speech, taciturn, silent MW. ;
-tâ̱ksha mfn. having the eyes closed BhP. ;
-tâ̱ñjali mfn. having the hands joined together in entreaty (= baddhôñjali) MW. ;
-tâ̱tman mfn. (= - ta-cetas) Mn. XI, 236 ;
-tâ̱hāra mfn. temperate in eating MBh. ;
- têndriya mfn. having the senses orﾠ passions controlled ib. ;
- tôpaskara mfn. having the household utensils kept in order Yājñ.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > संयत

19 द्रव _drava

द्रव a. [द्रु गतौ-भावे अप्]

1 Running (as a horse); सत्यो द्रवो द्रवरः पतङ्गरः Rv.4.4.2.

-2 Dropping, oozing, wet, dripping; आक्षिप्य काचिद् द्रवरागमेव (पादम्) R.7.7.

-3 Flowing, fluid.

-4 Liquid (opp. कठिन); द्रवः संघातकठिनः (असि) Ku.2.11.

-5 Melted, liquefied.

-वः 1 Going, walking about, motion.

-2 Dropping, trickling, oozing, exudation.

-3 Flight, retreat.

-4 Play, amusement, sport.

-5 Fluidity, liquefaction

-6 A liquid substance, fluid; द्रव इव हृदयस्य प्रस्तरोद्भेदयोग्यः U.3.25;2.16.

-7 Juice, essence; पिबत भागवतं रसमालयम् Bhāg.1.1.3.

-8 Decoction.

-9 Speed, velocity.

-1 (in drama) The flying out against one's superior. (द्रवीकृ means 'to melt, liquefy'. द्रवीभू to be melted, as with pity &c.; द्रवीभवति मे मनः Mv.7.34; द्रवीभूतं प्रेम्णा तव हृदयमस्मिन् क्षण इव U.3.13; द्रवीभूतं मन्ये पतति जलरूपेण गगनम् Mk.5.25.

-Comp. -आधारः 1 a small vessel or receiver.

-2 the hands joined together and hollowed (= चुलुक q. v.).

- इतर a. solid, hard; ससर्ज वृष्टिं परिरुग्णपादपां द्रवेतरेषां पयसामिवाश्मनाम् Ki.17.6.

-उत्तर a. very fluid.

-जः treacle.

-द्रव्यम् a fluid substance.

-रसा 1 lac.

-2 gum.

-3 extract.

Sanskrit-English dictionary > द्रव _drava

20 позиция высокий килиан

high kilian hold

позиция высокий килиан
Позиция в парном фигурном катании и танцах на льду, такая же, как позиция килиан, только одна пара соединенных рук поднята немного выше уровня плеч, а руки слегка согнуты в локтях.
[Департамент лингвистических услуг Оргкомитета «Сочи 2014». Глоссарий терминов]

EN

high kilian hold
Dance position used in pair figure skating and ice dance that is a kilian hold in which one pair of joined hands is elevated to slightly above shoulder height with the elbows slightly bent.
[Департамент лингвистических услуг Оргкомитета «Сочи 2014». Глоссарий терминов]

Тематики

фигурное катание

EN

high kilian hold

Русско-английский словарь нормативно-технической терминологии > позиция высокий килиан

Страницы

Следующая →

1

2

3

См. также в других словарях:

Hands Across America — infobox music festival music festival name = Hands Across America location = Across the United States Participation = founders = Ken Kragen years active= 1986 dates = May 25, 1986 genre = website = [http://www.usaforafrica.org/legacy/hands.htm… … Wikipedia

One Year Later — For the 1933 film directed by E. Mason Hopper, see One Year Later (film). One Year Later thematic stories Logo used by DC Comics in marketing the event. Publication information … Wikipedia

One Tree Hill (season 5) — One Tree Hill: Season 5 One Tree Hill Season 5 DVD Cover Country of origin … Wikipedia

One (Metallica song) — One Single by Metallica from the album ...And Justice for All … Wikipedia

One Moment of Humanity — Space: 1999 episode Episode no. Season 2 Episode 3 Directed by Charles Crichton Written by … Wikipedia

One Cell in the Sea — Studio album by A Fine Frenzy Released July 17, 2007 … Wikipedia

One Love (A. R. Rahman album) — One Love is an album by Indian composer A.R. Rahman, to commemorate the beauty of Taj Mahal and celebrate its status as one of the Ancient Seven Wonders of the World. The album consists of six versions of a track named One Love rendered in six… … Wikipedia

One Nation (Australia) — Not to be confused with the One Nation program of infrastructure works carried out from 1991 to 1996 by the Keating Labor Government. One Nation Leader Pauline Hanson (1997–2003) … Wikipedia

One Love Peace Concert — The One Love Peace Concert was a large concert held on April 22, 1978 at The National Stadium in Kingston, Jamaica. This concert was held during a political civil war in Jamaica between opposing parties Jamaican Labour Party and the People s… … Wikipedia

One Laptop per Child — OLPC redirects here. For other uses, see OLPC (disambiguation). One Laptop per Child Formation January 2005 Type Non profit Headquarters Cambridge, Massachuset … Wikipedia

One Tree Hill (song) — One Tree Hill Single by U2 … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

with one's hands joined

Тематики

EN

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на английский

with one's hands joined

Тематики

EN

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: